Yamaha RX-V3800 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V3800

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V3800

Printed in Malaysia WK69470

RX-V3800

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V3800_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 11:13 PM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Caution-i En

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may

cause the product and cart combination to

overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

Important safety instructions

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

Important safety instructions

Caution-ii En

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in

performance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

Caution-iii En

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit

with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not

be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this

unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.

vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press

MASTER ON/OFF to

release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the

main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC

power plug from the AC wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are as follows:

................................. 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or like.

21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can

cause hearing loss.

Responsible Party: Yamaha Electronics Corporation, U.S.A.

Address: 6660 Orangethorpe Avenue

Buena Park, CA 90620

Telephone: 714-522-9105

Fax: 714-670-0108

Type of Equipment: AV Receiver

Model Name: RX-V3800

• This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

• Operation is subject to the following conditions:

– This device may not cause harmful interference.

– This device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See the “Troubleshooting” section at the end of this manual if

interference to radio reception is suspected.

Caution: read this before operating your unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,

it is not disconnected from the AC power source even

if you turn off this unit by

MASTER ON/OFF. In

this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

1 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

English

Notices...................................................................... 2

Features ................................................................... 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 4

Getting started ........................................................ 5

Quick start guide .................................................... 6

Connections........................................................... 12

Optimizing the speaker setting

for your listening room (YPAO) ..................... 37

Using the automatic setup (Auto Setup).................. 37

Playback ................................................................ 41

Basic procedure ....................................................... 41

Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 42

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 42

Using your headphones............................................ 42

Muting the audio output........................................... 43

Playing video sources in the background

of an audio source................................................ 43

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 43

Operating the amplifier functions of this unit by using

the graphical user interface (GUI) screen............ 44

Sound field programs ........................................... 45

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 45

Sound field program descriptions............................ 45

Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode............................... 50

Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 50

Using audio features ............................................. 51

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 51

Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 51

Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 52

Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo

....... 52

FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 53

Automatic tuning ..................................................... 53

Manual tuning.......................................................... 53

Automatic preset tuning........................................... 54

Manual preset tuning ............................................... 54

Selecting preset stations........................................... 55

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 55

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning ............................... 56

Connecting the XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock...... 56

Activating XM™ Satellite Radio ............................ 57

Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations................... 57

Setting the XM™ Satellite Radio preset channels

....... 59

Displaying the XM™ Satellite Radio information

...... 60

Using iPod™.......................................................... 62

Controlling iPod™................................................... 62

Using Network/USB features............................... 64

Navigating the network and USB menus................. 64

Using a PC server or Yamaha MCX-2000 .............. 66

Using the Internet Radio.......................................... 67

Using a USB memory device or a USB

portable audio player ........................................... 68

Using shortcut buttons ............................................. 68

Recording .............................................................. 70

Advanced sound configurations...........................71

Selecting decoders ................................................... 71

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen................73

Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) ............... 74

Input Select .............................................................. 81

Manual Setup (Volume) .......................................... 84

Manual Setup (Sound) ............................................. 85

Manual Setup (Video) ............................................. 89

Manual Setup (Basic) .............................................. 91

Manual Setup (NET/USB)....................................... 94

Manual Setup (Option) ............................................ 96

Signal Info. (Input signal information).................... 98

Language ................................................................. 99

Saving and recalling the system settings

(System Memory) ............................................100

Saving the current system settings......................... 100

Loading the stored system settings........................ 101

Using examples...................................................... 102

Remote control features......................................105

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

...... 105

Setting remote control codes ................................. 107

Programming codes from other remote controls

....... 109

Changing source names in the display window

........ 110

Macro programming features ................................ 111

Clearing configurations ......................................... 114

Using multi-zone configuration..........................117

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components

....... 117

Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 118

Advanced setup....................................................122

Using the advanced setup menu ............................ 122

Troubleshooting...................................................127

Resetting the system............................................137

Glossary................................................................138

Sound field program information......................142

Parametric equalizer information .....................143

Specifications .......................................................144

Index.....................................................................146

(at the end of this manual)

Front Panel................................................................i

Remote Control ...................................................... ii

Sound output in each sound field program......... iii

GPL/LGPL...............................................................v

List of remote control codes ..................................ix

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

APPENDIX

“

MASTER ON/OFF” or “

DVD” (example) indicates

the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.

Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this

manual for the information about each position of the parts.

Notices

2 En

Note on source code distribution

This product includes software code subject to the GNU General

Public License (GPL) or the GNU Lesser General Public License

(LGPL). The copy, distribution, or change of this software code is

licensed under the terms of the GPL or the LGPL. The source

code is available at the following website:

http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/

The source code is also available on a physical media (such as a

CD-ROM) at actual cost.

Contact: AV products division, YAMAHA CORPORATION,

10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu 430-8650,

Japan

In principle, the source code is offered for 3 years from the day of

purchase.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s

Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the

most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe

level. One that lets the sound come through loud and

clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and,

most importantly, without affecting your sensitive

hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic

Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group

recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive

volume levels.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:

5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535

& other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a

registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and

other countries.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

This receiver supports network connections.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo, and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM

Satellite Radio Inc.

This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio

Corporation and THX Ltd. YAMAHA CORPORATION hereby

grants the user a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited right of

use to this product under U.S.A. and foreign patent, patent

pending and other technology or trademarks owned by Neural

Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural Surround”, “Neural

Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and logos owned by

Neural Audio Corporation. THX is a trademark of THX Ltd.,

which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights

reserved.

Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Media Audio, Windows

Media Connect and Windows Media Player are either registered

trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United

States and/or other countries.

Notices

About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the

buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote

control. In case the button names differ between the front

panel and the remote control, the button name on the

remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and

specifications are subject to change in part as a result of

improvements, etc. In case of differences between the

manual and product, the product has priority.

• This unit is equipped with GUI display menu language

switching capability. In this manual, the illustrations of the

GUI are examples when you set the GUI language to

English.

•

“A

MASTER ON/OFF” or “

DVD” (example)

indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the

remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at

the end of this manual for the information about each

position of the parts.

• The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the

corresponding reference page(s).

iPod

Features

3 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)

Front: 140 W + 140 W

Center: 140 W

Surround: 140 W + 140 W

Surround back: 140 W + 140 W

Sound field programs

◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound

fields

◆ CINEMA DSP 3D mode for creating intensive and accurate

stereoscopic sound field

◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound

quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to

that of a high-quality multi-channel source playback

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

Digital audio decoders

◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder

◆ DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

decoder

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx

decoder

◆ DTS NEO:6 decoder

◆ Neural-THX Surround decoder

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Sophisticated FM/AM tuner

◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

XM™ Satellite Radio

◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using XM Mini-Tuner

and Home Dock, sold separately)

◆ Neural-THX Surround decoder to play back the XM HD

content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels,

resulting in a full surround sound experience

◆ XM Satellite Radio information displaying capability

HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or

high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio

based on HDMI version 1.3a

◆ Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)

information capability

◆ Deep Color video signal (30/36 bits) transmission capability

◆ High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability

◆ High definition digital audio format signals capability

◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion

(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI

digital video) capability for monitor out

◆ Analog video up-scaling from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) or

480p/576p to 720p, 1080i or 1080p

iPod controlling capability

◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod

(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini

Network features

◆ NETWORK port to connect a PC and Yamaha MCX-2000 or

access the Internet Radio via LAN

◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration

USB features

◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable

audio player

Other features

◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for

automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ GUI (graphical user interface) menus that allow you to

optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video system

◆ GUI display menu language switching capability

(English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish and Russian)

◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-

channel input

◆ Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from 480i

(NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability includes

(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources

◆ Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability

◆ Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning,

macro and buttons and display backlight capability

◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility

◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS

◆ Zone 2 video output and displaying OSD (on-screen display)

capability

◆ System Memory capability for saving and recalling multiple

system parameter settings

◆ Sleep timer

Features

4 En

Check that you received all of the following parts.

The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models.

Supplied accessories

Note

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

NET RADIO

USB

PC/MCX

VOLUME

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

3D DSP

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

NET/USB

–

ENTER

TITLE

MUTE

ENT

SYSTEM MEMORY

TV VOL

MEMORY

POWER

–

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

RETURN

Remote control

Batteries (6)

(AAA, LR03)

AM loop antenna

Optimizer microphoneSpeaker terminal wrench Power cable

(Two for Asia model)

Indoor FM antenna

TUNER

CD-R

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD

NET/USB

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX/DOCK

DVR

POWER

STANDBY

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET

VOLUME

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

ID2

ID1

NUMBER

CAT.

ALL

PRESET

DISPLAY

MUTE

ENT

Zone 2/Zone 3

remote control

Getting started

5 En

INTRODUCTION

English

■ Installing batteries in the remote control

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2 Insert the four supplied batteries

(AAA, LR03) according to the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

■ Installing batteries in the Zone 2/Zone 3

remote control

1 Take off the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, LR03)

according to the polarity markings

(+ and –) on the inside of the battery

compartment.

3 Snap the battery compartment cover back

into place.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions:

– the operation range of the remote control decreases.

– the transmit indicator (P) does not flash or its light becomes

dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• We strongly recommend that you use alkaline batteries.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2

minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,

the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory

is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code

and program any acquired functions that may have been

cleared.

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or

counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight

slot screwdriver.

Voltages are as follows:

.......................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

Getting started

Notes

Caution

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE

plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet.

Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may

cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire

hazard.

230-

240V

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

Voltage indication

Quick start guide

6 En

The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater.

In these steps, you need the following supplied

accessories.

❏ AM loop antenna

❏ Indoor FM antenna

❏ Power cable

The following items are not included in the package of this

unit.

❏ Speakers

❏ Front speaker ..................................... x 2

❏ Center speaker ................................... x 1

❏ Surround speaker .............................. x 4

Select magnetically shielded speakers. The

minimum required speakers are two front speakers.

The priority of the requirement of other speakers is

as follows:

1. Two surround speakers

2. One center speaker

3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)

❏ Active subwoofer ................................... x 1

Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA

input jack.

❏ Speaker cable ......................................... x 7

❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... x 1

Select a monaural RCA cable.

❏ DVD player .............................................. x 1

Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital

audio output jack and composite video output

jack.

❏ Video monitor.......................................... x 1

Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector

equipped with a composite video input jack.

❏ Video cable ............................................. x 2

Select an RCA composite video cables.

❏ Digital coaxial audio cable .................... x 1

Quick start guide

Front right

speaker

Subwoofer

Surround back

right speaker

Surround left

speaker

Front left

speaker

Surround back left

speaker

Surround right

speaker

Center

speaker

Video monitor

DVD player

Enjoy DVD playback!

Step 1: Set up your speakers

☞ P. 7

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

Step 3: Turn on the power and

start playback

☞ P. 8

☞ P. 10

Preparation: Check the items

Quick start guide

7 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this

unit.

1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the

room.

2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.

3 Connect each speaker cable to the

corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.

1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are

unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables

together to prevent short circuits.

3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.

4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal

part of this unit.

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel

(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.

Front speakers and center speaker

Surround and surround back speakers

4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and

the input jack of the subwoofer.

Step 1: Set up your speakers

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

HOLDER

WRENCH

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

ANTENNA

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

REMOTE

PHONO

GND

IN(PLAY)

OUT(REC)

CD-R

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

DOCK

NETWORK

DIGITAL INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

DIGITAL OUTPUT

ZONE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE

VIDEO

DVD

DVR

COAXIAL

+12V 16mA MAX.

BD/

HD DVD

DTV/

CBL

MD/

TAPE

DVD CD-R

OPTICAL

987

321

SB(8CH)

DVD

TAPE

MD/

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR 1

DTV/CBL

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD

DVD

DTV/CBL

MONITOR OUT

OUT

DVR

DTV/

CBL

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

OUT

A B C

+ + +

+ +

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN1

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Speaker terminals

12 3 4

To the front left

speaker

To the front right

speaker

To the center speaker

Loosen Insert Tighten

Speaker terminal wrench

To the surround right

speaker

To the surround left

speaker

To the surround

back left speaker

To the surround back

right speaker

Input jack

AV receiverSubwoofer

Subwoofer cable

Quick start guide

8 En

1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the

digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD

player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL

jack of this unit.

2 Connect the video cable to the composite

video output jack of your DVD player and the

DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.

3 Connect the video cable to the VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video

input jack of your video monitor.

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

HOLDER

WRENCH

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

ANTENNA

GND

Ω

UNBAL.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

REMOTE

PHONO

GND

IN(PLAY)

OUT(REC)

CD-R

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

DOCK

NETWORK

DIGITAL INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

DIGITAL OUTPUT

ZONE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE

VIDEO

DVD

DVR

COAXIAL

+12V 16mA MAX.

BD/

HD DVD

DTV/

CBL

MD/

TAPE

DVD CD-R

OPTICAL

987

321

SB(8CH)

DVD

TAPE

MD/

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR 1

DTV/CBL

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD

DVD

DTV/CBL

MONITOR OUT

OUT

DVR

DTV/

CBL

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

OUT

A B C

+ + +

+ +

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN1

Make sure that this unit and the DVD

player are unplugged from the AC

wall outlets.

VIDEO MONITOR OUTDVD VIDEO

DVD DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL

AC IN

Digital coaxial

audio output

jack

Digital coaxial audio

cable

DVD DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL jack

DVD player

AV receiver

Composite video

output jack

Video cable

DVD VIDEO jack

DVD player

AV receiver

Video monitor

AV receiver

Video cable

VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jack

Video input

jack

Quick start guide

9 En

INTRODUCTION

English

4 Connect the supplied AM loop antenna and

indoor FM antenna to this unit.

The types of the supplied indoor FM antenna and the FM

antenna terminal of this unit are different depending on the

models.

Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna

The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity

and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND

terminal.

Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna

5 Connect the supplied power cable to AC IN of

this unit and then plug the power cable and

other components into the AC wall outlet.

• This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) that provide(s)

power to other components (except Korea model). See

page 32 for details.

• (Asia model only) Select one of the supplied power cables

suitable for the type of AC wall outlet in your location

before plugging this into the AC wall outlet.

Note

Indoor FM antenna

AM loop antenna

Open the lever

Insert

Close the lever

For further connections

• Using other kinds of speaker combinations

☞ P. 13

• Connecting a video monitor via various ways of

connection ☞ P. 23

• Connecting a DVD player via various ways of

connection ☞ P. 25

• Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video

recorder ☞ P. 26

• Connecting a set-top box ☞ P. 26

• Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder, or a

turntable ☞ P. 27

• Connecting an external amplifier ☞ P. 28

• Connecting a DVD player via multi-channel analog

audio connection ☞ P. 29

• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock ☞ P. 30

• Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ☞ P. 30

• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel

☞ P. 30

• Connecting FM/AM antennas ☞ P. 32

• Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ☞ P. 56

• Connecting this unit to your network ☞ P. 31

• Connecting a USB device ☞ P. 68

General connection information

• General information on jacks and cable plugs

☞ P. 20

• General information on HDMI ☞ P. 21

• Speaker impedance settings ☞ P. 33

Quick start guide

10 En

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON

position on the front panel.

3 Rotate the

INPUT selector to set the input

source to “DVD”.

• The recommended sound field program is set for each

input source (DVD, etc.). You can also use various sound

field programs and other sound modes for playback. Refer

to the following pages for details:

– see pages 50 and 71 to use various sound field

programs

– see page 50 to turn on or off the sound effect

– see page 51 to use the pure direct mode for high

fidelity sound

• You can also set the input source to “TUNER” to use the

FM/AM tuning feature. For information on the FM/AM

tuning, see pages 53 to 55.

4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your

player.

5 Rotate

VOLUME to adjust the volume.

■ After using this unit...

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to

the standby mode.

This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small

amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from

the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby

mode, press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel

(or

POWER on the remote control). See page 33 for

details.

Step 3: Turn on the power and start

playback

Check the type of the connected speakers.

If the speakers are 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER

IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see

page 122). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the

front speakers (see page 33).

Quick start guide

11 En

INTRODUCTION

English

What do you want to do with this unit?

Using various input sources

• Basic operations of this unit ☞ P. 41

• Enjoying FM/AM radio programs ☞ P. 53

• Enjoying XM Satellite Radio programs ☞ P. 56

• Using your iPod with this unit ☞ P. 62

• Enjoying the contents stored on your PC ☞ P. 64

• Enjoying Internet radio programs and Podcasts

☞ P. 67

• Using USB devices with this unit ☞ P. 68

Using various sound features

• Using various sound field programs ☞ P. 45

• Using the Pure Direct mode for high fidelity sound

☞ P. 51

• Adjusting the tonal quality of the speakers

☞ P. 51

• Customizing the sound field programs ☞ P. 74

Adjusting the parameters of this unit

• Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters for

your listening room (Auto Setup) ☞ P. 37

• Setting the remote control ☞ P. 105

Additional features

• Displaying the current input source signal

information in the GUI ☞ P. 98

• Saving and recalling the system settings of this unit

(System Memory) ☞ P. 100

• Using headphones ☞ P. 42

• Using this unit in multiple rooms simultaneously

(multi-zone configuration) ☞ P. 117

• Automatically turning off this unit ☞ P. 43

Manually adjusting various parameters

of this unit

• Setting the language of the GUI menu ☞ P. 99

• Assigning the input/output jacks of this unit

☞ P. 82

• Setting the parameters for each input source

☞ P. 81

• Setting the parameters related to the volume level

☞ P. 84

• Adjusting the tonal quality of each channel manually

by using the parametric equalizer ☞ P. 85

• Adjusting the audio and video synchronization

☞ P. 87

• Muting the selected speaker channel ☞ P. 88

• Setting the parameters related to the video signals

☞ P. 89

• Setting the basic speaker configuration ☞ P. 91

• Setting the network parameters ☞ P. 94

• Setting the parameters of the multi-zone feature

☞ P. 96

• Protecting the various settings ☞ P. 98

Adjusting the advanced parameters

• Setting the speaker impedance of the connected

speakers ☞ P. 122

• Setting the language of the GUI menu ☞ P. 126

• Setting the video format of the connected video

monitor ☞ P. 126

• Setting the parameters of this unit to default values

☞ P. 137

CONNECTIONS

12 En

A TRIGGER OUT jack

This is a control expansion terminal for custom

installation. Consult your dealer for details.

A RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only.

Consult your dealer for details.

Connections

Rear panel

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

HOLDER

WRENCH

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

ANTENNA

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

REMOTE

PHONO

GND

IN(PLAY)

OUT(REC)

CD-R

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

DOCK

NETWORK

DIGITAL INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

DIGITAL OUTPUT

ZONE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE

VIDEO

COAXIAL

+12V 16mA MAX.

BD/

HD DVD

DTV/

CBL

MD/

TAP E

DVD CD-R

OPTICAL

987

321

SB(8CH)

DVD

TAP E

MD/

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR

DTV/CBL

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD

DVD

DTV/CBL

MONITOR OUT

OUT

DVR

DTV/

CBL

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

OUT

A B C

+++

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN1

89 0 A B

23 4 567

Name Page

1 HDMI connectors

2 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

23 – 26

3 Audio component jacks

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

4 Video component jacks

23 – 26

5 ANTENNA terminals

6 VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

7 AC IN

AC OUTLET(S)

8 DOCK terminal

XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

9 NETWORK port

0 DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks

B MULTI CH INPUT jacks

PRE OUT jacks

ZONE OUT jacks

117

Speaker terminals

WRENCH HOLDER

13 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy the CINEMA DSP and

multi-channel audio sources.

■ 7.1-channel speaker layout

7.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended for playback the sound of high definition audio formats (Dolby

TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.) as well as the conventional audio sources with sound field programs. See page 15

for connection information.

We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See page 17 for

details.

Front left and right speakers

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the

ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a

center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.

Surround left and right speakers

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.

Surround back left and right speakers

The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.

Subwoofer

The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high fidelity

sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the

subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer

near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.

Placing speakers

SBR

SBL

60˚

30˚

SBL

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

Speaker indications

FL/FR: Front left/right

C: Center

SL/SR: Surround left/right

SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right

SW: Subwoofer

30 cm (12 in) or more

14 En

Connections

■ 6.1-channel speaker layout

See page 15 for connection information.

We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the

effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See

page 17 for details.

Front left and right speakers

Center speaker

Surround left and right speakers

Subwoofer

The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as

those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 13).

Surround back speaker

Connect a single surround speakers to the SURROUND

BACK SINGLE speaker terminal and place the single

surround back speaker behind the listening position. The

surround back left and right channel signals are mixed

down and output at the single surround back speaker when

you set “Surround Back” to “Small x1” or “Large x1” (see

page 92).

■ 5.1-channel speaker layout

See page 15 for connection information.

We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the

effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See

page 17 for details.

Front left and right speakers

Center speaker

Subwoofer

The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as

those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 13).

Surround left and right speakers

Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND

speaker terminals even if you place the surround speakers

behind the listening position. For the smooth and

unbroken sound field behind the listening position, place

the surround left and right speakers farther back compared

with the placement in the 7.1-channel speaker layout. The

surround back channel signals are directed to the surround

left and right speakers when “Surround Back” is set to

“None” (see page 92).

1.8 m (6 ft)

60˚

30˚

80˚

Speaker indications

FL/FR: Front left/right

C: Center

SL/SR: Surround left/right

SB: Surround back left/right

SW: Subwoofer

60˚

30˚

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

Speaker indications

FL/FR: Front left/right

C: Center

SL/SR: Surround left/right

SW: Subwoofer

For other speaker combinations

You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field programs by using a speaker combination other than the 7.1/

6.1/5.1-channel speaker combinations.

Use the automatic setup feature (see page 37) or set the “Speaker Set” parameters in “Manual Setup” (see page 91) to

output the surround sounds at the connected speakers.

15 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,

this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.

• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a

stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the

plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

• You can use the SP1 terminals to connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers as well as the presence speakers (see page 118).

■ For the 7.1-channel speaker setting

Connecting speakers

Caution

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 33).

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could

damage this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the

speakers away from the monitor.

• If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see

page 33). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers (see page 122).

Notes

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

SUB

WOOFER

+ + +

+ +

Front speakers

Surround speakers

Subwoofer

Left

Center speaker

Surround back speakers

Right

Left

Right

Zone 2 or Zone 3

speakers

(see page 117)

16 En

Connections

■ For the 6.1-channel speaker setting

■ For the 5.1-channel speaker setting

Surround back speakers

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

SUB

WOOFER

+ +

Front speakers

Surround speakers

Subwoofer

Left

Center speaker

Left

Right

Zone 2 or Zone 3

speakers

(see page 117)

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

SUB

WOOFER

+ + +

+ +

Front speakers

Surround speakers

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Left

Right

Zone 2 or Zone 3

speakers

(see page 117)

Front speakers for the

bi-amplification

connections

(see page 19)

17 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound

field programs (see page 45). Presence left and right speakers function more effectively when the CINEMA DSP 3D

mode is active (see page 50). You can adjust the vertical position of dialogues with using the presence speakers (see

page 75). To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to SP1 speaker terminals and then set “Presence” to “Yes”

(see page 92).

• If “Presence” is set to “None”, this unit cannot activate the CINEMA DSP 3D mode.

• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. This unit

automatically switches the presence speakers and surround back speakers depending on the input sources and the selected sound field

programs. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PR/SB Priority” parameter in “Basic” (see page 93).

■ Connecting presence left and right speakers

Using presence speakers

Notes

PRPL

1.8 m

(6 ft)

0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)

1.8 m

(6 ft)

Speaker indications

FL: Front left

FR: Front right

C: Center

PL: Presence left

PR: Presence right

SPEAKERS

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

+ +

Presence speakers

Right Left

18 En

Connections

■ Connecting the speaker cable

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable and then twist the exposed wires of the

cable together to prevent short circuits.

2 Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker

terminal wrench.

3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side

of each terminal.

4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the

supplied speaker terminal wrench.

5 Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto the

WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this

unit when not in use.

■ Connecting to the SP2 speaker

terminals

Connect Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to these terminals (see

page 117).

1 Open the tab.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the

terminal.

3 Close the tab to secure the wire.

10 mm (0.4 in)

Speaker terminal wrench

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

19 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Connecting the banana plug

(except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea

models)

1 Tighten the knob using the supplied speaker

terminal wrench.

2 Insert the banana plug connector into the

end of the corresponding terminal.

You can also use the banana plug with the SP2 speaker terminals.

Open the tab and then insert one banana plug into the hole on the

terminal. Do not close the tab after connecting the banana plug.

■ Using bi-amplification connections

This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections

to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-

amplification.

To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT

and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP terminals as shown

below. To activate the bi-amplification connections, set

“BI-AMP” to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see

page 126).

When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the

shorting bars are put into the terminals of the speakers

appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the speakers for

details.

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Speaker terminal wrench

Banana plug

Caution

Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers

to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high

pass filter) crossovers.

Note

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

FRONT

SINGLE

SURROUND

+ +

This unit

LeftRight

Front speakers

20 En

Connections

■ Audio jacks

This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other

components.

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left

and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the

right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital

audio cables.

DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital

audio cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the

COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals

input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are

compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connect the video

input jacks of this unit to the video output jacks of the

input source components to switch the audio and video

sources simultaneously. Connection depends on the

availability of input jacks on your video monitor.

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals transmitted via

composite video cables.

S VIDEO jacks

For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and

chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate

wires of S-video cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component video signals, separated into the

luminance (Y) and chrominance (P

B, PR) video signals

transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.

This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See

pages 22 and 89 for details.

Information on jacks and cable plugs

Note

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

Left and right

analog audio

cable plugs

Optical

digital

audio cable

plug

Coaxial

digital audio

cable plug

Audio jacks and cable plugs

(Red)(White) (Orange)

VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Composite

video cable

plug

S-video

cable plug

Component

video cable

plugs

Video jacks and cable plugs

(Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)

21 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

This unit has four HDMI input jacks and one HDMI

output jack for digital audio and video signal input/output.

Connect the HDMI IN1, HDMI IN2, HDMI IN3, or

HDMI IN4 jack of this unit to the HDMI output jack of

other HDMI components (such as a DVD player). Connect

the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI input jack

of other HDMI components (such as a TV and a

projector).

The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks of

the selected input source are output at the HDMI OUT

jack of this unit.

• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI

connection (see page 98).

• See page 145 for the information on the input signal capability

of this unit for the HDMI connection.

■ HDMI jack and cable plug

• We recommend that you use a commercially available HDMI

cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo

printed on it.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack

↔ DVI-D jack) to connect

this unit to other DVI components.

• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of

the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of

this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt

playback or cause noise.

• The HDMI OUT jack outputs the audio signals input at the

HDMI input jacks only even if “Support Audio” is set to

“Other” (see page 98).

• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the

HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to

establish the connection to the component.

• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video

and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be

output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “Conversion” to “On” in

“Manual Setup” (see page 89) to activate this feature.

■ Default input assignment of HDMI input

jacks

Information on HDMI™

Notes

HDMI

HDMI cable plug

HDMI input jack Assigned input source

IN1 BD/HD DVD

IN2 DVD

IN3 DTV/CBL

IN4 DVR

22 En

Connections

■ Audio signal flow

• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS signals input at the HDMI input jacks can be output at the

HDMI OUT jack only when “Support Audio” is set to “Other”

(see page 98).

• The following types of audio signals can be only input at HDMI

input jacks:

–DSD

–Dolby TrueHD

– Dolby Digital Plus

– DTS-HD Master Audio

– DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

■ Video signal flow

You can deinterlace and convert the resolution of the video

signals by using “Video” parameters. See page 89 for details.

• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT

VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the

input signals is as follows:

1. COMPONENT VIDEO

2. S VIDEO

3. VIDEO

• Digital video signals input at the HDMI input jacks cannot be

output from analog video output jacks.

• The analog component video signals (with 480i (NTSC)/576i

(PAL) of resolution only) are converted to the S-video or

composite video signals and output at the VIDEO or S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jacks.

• The analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution

are only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jacks.

• The GUI signal is not output at the DVR OUT and

VCR OUT jacks and is not recorded.

Audio and video signal flow

Notes

DIGITAL AUDIO

(OPTICAL)

DIGITAL AUDIO

(COAXIAL)

HDMI

AUDIO

OutputInput

Analog output

Digital output

Notes

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

Through

OutputInput

Video conversion ON (see page 89)

23 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack,

the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR

OUT jack of this unit.

You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on

another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on

the rear panel of this unit. Use the “Support Audio” parameter in

“Option” to select the component to play back HDMI audio

signals (see page 98).

• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI

connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals

being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the

HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.

• Set “Conversion” in “Video” to “On” (see page 89) to display

the short message displays.

• The GUI screen appears with the wall paper or gray background

depending on the input video signal format and the setting of

the parameters in “Wall Paper” (see page 91).

• If the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic

audio and video synchronization feature (automatic lip sync

feature), this unit adjusts the audio and video timing

automatically (see page 87). Connect the video monitor to the

HDMI OUT jack of this unit to use the feature.

Connecting a TV monitor or projector

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

Notes

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OUT

PR PB

(or projector)

Video in

Component video in

S-video in

HDMI in

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

24 En

Connections

• When “Conversion” is set to “Off” (see page 89), be sure to

make the same type of video connections as those made for

your TV (see page 23). For example, if you connected your TV

to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

MULTI ZONE

YPAO

OPTICAL

AUDIO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

Game console or

video camera

Optical output

Video output

S-Video output

Audio output

31 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the

NETWORK port of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP

(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this

unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and Yamaha MCX-

2000 or access the Internet Radio, each device must be connected properly in the network.

• You must use an STP cable (commercially available) to connect a network hub or router and this unit.

• If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 94).

• Yamaha MCX-2000, MCX-A10 and MCX-C15 may not be for sale in same locations.

Connecting the network

Notes

NETWORK

LAN

WAN

Router

Modem

Yamaha MCX-2000

Internet

Yamaha MCX-C15

Yamaha MCX-A10

(with optional

speakers)

Network cable

32 En

Connections

Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this

unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated

terminals. In general, these antennas should provide

sufficient signal strength.

• (Asia and General models only) Be sure to set the tuner

frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area

(see page 126).

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,

install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.

■ Connecting the AC power cable

Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after

all other connections are complete, then plug the AC

power cable into an AC wall outlet.

(Asia model only) Select one of the supplied power cables

suitable for the type of AC wall outlet in your location before

plugging this unit into the AC wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet

Korea model............................................................... None

Other models......................................................... 2 outlets

Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected

components. Connect the power cable of your other

components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is

supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to

these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For

information on the maximum power or the total power

consumption of the components that can be connected to

these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on page 144.

Connecting the FM and AM

antennas

Notes

ANTENNA

GND

Indoor FM

antenna

(supplied)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the

antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth

ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.

AM loop

antenna

(supplied)

Outdoor AM antenna

Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 32 ft)

vinyl-covered wire extended

outdoors from a window.

Connecting the power cable

Note

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, the stored data will be lost in case the power

cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the

power supply is cut off for more than one week.

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

To the AC wall outlet

33 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Before using this unit, set the speaker impedance of the

connected speakers and the language of the menu items

and messages, that appears in the GUI (graphical user

interface) screen of this unit.

1 Make sure this unit is turned off.

2 Press and hold

STRAIGHT on the front

panel and then press

MASTER ON/OFF

inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu (see

page 122) appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to select

“SPEAKER IMP.”.

4 Press

STRAIGHT repeatedly to select

“6ΩMIN”.

5 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to select

“GUI LANGUAGE”.

6 Press

STRAIGHT repeatedly to select the

desired language setting for the GUI screen

in the video monitor.

Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE

(Japanese), FRENCH (French), GERMAN

(German), SPANISH (Spanish), RUSSIAN

(Russian)

• This setting does not affect to the messages that appear in the

front panel display.

• You can also select the GUI language by using GUI screen. See

page 99 for details.

7 Press

MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to save the new

setting and turn off this unit.

The setting you made is reflected next time you turn

on this unit.

■ Turning on this unit

Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.

When you turn on this unit by pressing

MASTER ON/

OFF, the main zone is turned on.

When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few

seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.

■ Turning off this unit

Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

again to release it outward to the OFF position to

turn off this unit.

•

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as

POWER and

STANDBY on the remote control are

operational only when

MASTER ON/OFF is pressed

inward to the ON position.

• Basically, we recommend that you use the standby mode to turn

off this unit.

■ Turning on the main zone from the

standby mode

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

(or

STANDBY

)

to set the main zone to the standby mode.

In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote

control.

■ Set the main zone to the standby mode

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or

POWER) to

turn on the main zone.

• When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few

seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.

• These buttons are operational only when

MASTER ON/

OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.

Setting the speaker impedance

and GUI language

Caution

If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER IMP.”

to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. You

can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Notes

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

Turning this unit on and off

Notes

If there are some problems...

• First, turn off and then turn on this unit again.

• If problems persist, initialize the parameters of this

unit. See page 137 for details.

34 En

Connections

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

2LIGHT

Lights up the remote control buttons and the display

window (B).

Display window (B)

Shows the name of the selected input source that you can

control.

Infrared window (Q)

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

Transmit indicator (P)

Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared

signals.

Operation mode selector (D)

The function of some buttons depends on the operation

mode selector position.

AMP

Operates the amplifier function of this unit.

SOURCE

Operates the component selected with an input

selector button (see page 106).

Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or

PHONO (see page 105).

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types

of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel

door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of

the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these

controls.

Using the remote control

30 30

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

Remote control sensor

Notes

Opening and closing the front

panel door

To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.

35 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

1 RECOUT indicator

Lights up when this unit is in the recording input source

selecting mode (see page 70).

2 HDMI indicator

Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is

input at one of the HDMI input jacks (see page 21).

3 DOCK indicator

Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod

universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)

connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit

(see page 30).

4 Battery charge indicator

Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the

stationed iPod in the standby mode of this unit (see

page 62).

5 Input source indicators

The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently

selected input source.

The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada

models.

6 MUTE indicator and VOLUME level indicator

• Indicates the current volume level.

• The MUTE indicator flashes while the MUTE function

is on (see page 43).

7 Multi-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

8 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

9 Input channel and speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

• Indicate the channel components of the current

digital input signal.

• Light up or flash according to the settings of the

speakers when this unit is in the auto setup

procedure (see page 37) or the speaker level setting

procedure in the “Speaker Level” (see page 94).

Presence speaker indicators

Light up according to setting for “Presence” (see

page 92) in “Speaker Set” when this unit is in the auto

setup procedure (see page 37) or the speaker level

setting procedure in the “Speaker Level” (see

page 94).

You can make settings for the presence and surround back

speakers automatically by running “Auto Setup” (see

page 37) or manually by adjusting settings for “Presence”

(see page 92) and “Surround Back” (see page 92) in

“Speaker Set”.

Front panel display

MUTE

VOLUME

LL C R

SL SB SR

MP3

WMA

DSD

neural

PCM

96/24

TUNED

STEREO

AUTO

MEMORY

ZONE2

ZONE3

SLEEP

CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH

TUNER

MD/TAPE

BD/HD DVD

DVD

NET/USB

DOCK

DVR

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX

MASTER AUDIO

MATRIX

DISCRETE

SILENT

CINEMA

YPAO ENHANCER

VIRTUAL

HiFi

DSP

DIGITAL PLUS

TRUE HD

PL x

LFE

SBRSBL

RECOUT

TUNED

STEREO

AUTO

MEMORY

ZONE2

ZONE3

SLEEP

1 465

See page 36 for details.

Note

Presence speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

LL C R

SL SB SR

LFE

SBRSBL

36 En

Connections

0 Tuner indicators

Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM or XM Satellite

Radio tuning mode.

TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station

(see page 53).

STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal

for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator

is lit (see page 53).

AUTO indicator

Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning

mode (see page 53).

MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show that a station can be stored

(see page 55).

MEMORY indicator also flashes while this unit is in the

shortcut memory preset mode of NET/USB (see page 68).

A ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators

Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on

(see page 117).

B SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 43).

C neural indicator

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Lights up when the Neural-THX Surround decoder is

activated (see page 71).

D YPAO indicator

Lights up when you run “Auto Setup” and when the

speaker settings set in “Auto Setup” are used without any

modifications (see page 37).

E Input signal indicators

The respective indicator lights up when this unit is

reproducing DSD (Direct Stream Digital), PCM (Pulse

Code Modulation), WMA (Windows Media Audio), or

MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) audio signals.

F DSP indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound

field programs are selected.

CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound

field program (see page 45).

HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field

program (see page 51).

VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 50).

3D indicator

Lights up when the CINEMA DSP 3D mode is active

(see page 50).

G Sound field indicators

Light up to indicate the active sound fields (see page 45).

H ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is

turned on (see page 49).

I Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 42).

J SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 50).

K Decoder indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the

decoders of this unit function.

MP3

WMA

DSD

neural

PCM

MASTER AUDIO

MATRIX

DISCRETE

SILENT

CINEMA

YPAO ENHANCER

DIGITAL PLUS

TRUE HD

PL x

VIRTUAL

HiFi

DSP

OPTIMIZING THE SPEAKER SETTING FOR YOUR LISTENING ROOM (YPAO)

37 En

PREPARATION

English

This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid

troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the automatic setup procedure.

• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as

possible while the automatic setup procedure is in progress. If

there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be

satisfactory.

• If an error occurs during the automatic setup procedure and an

error or warning message appears in the GUI screen or in the

front panel display, see the “Auto Setup” section in

“Troubleshooting” on pages 135 and 136 for a complete list of

error and warning messages and proper remedies.

• The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold.

• Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector

on the remote control to

AMP.

■ Basic procedure of the automatic setup

1 Make sure of the following check points

before starting the automatic setup

operations.

❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.

❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.

❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on.

❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the

volume level is set to about half way (or slightly

less).

❏ The crossover frequency controls of the

connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.

❏ If you use the external amplifiers (see page 28),

the amplifiers are turned on and the settings are

appropriate.

❏ The room is sufficiently quiet.

2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

“MIC ON” and “View OSD MENU” appears in the

front panel display.

The following menu screen appears on the video

monitor.

Following message appears in the front panel display after a

while. You can only perform the automatic setup with the

GUI menu.

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

Using the automatic setup

(Auto Setup)

Notes

VOLUME

MIN

MAX

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER

HIGH CUT

Controls of a subwoofer (example)

SLEEP

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

REC OUT/

ZONE2

PROGRAM

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

USB

ZONE 2

AUDI O

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

FM/AM

PRESET/

TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

MULTI ZONE

YPAO

Omni-directional

microphone

MIC ON

VIEW OSD MENU

Information

Setup Menu

Start Start: ENTER

GUI

RX-V3800

38 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

3 Place the optimizer microphone at your

normal listening position on a flat level

surface with the omni-directional

microphone heading upward.

It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the

optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would

be when you are seated in your listening position. You can

use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer

microphone to the tripod (etc.).

4 Press

ENTER to start the setup

procedure.

This unit starts the automatic setup procedure

immediately. Loud test tones are output from each

speaker during the automatic setup procedure. During

the setup procedure, “Measuring...” appears in the

GUI screen.

• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any

operation on this unit.

• We recommend that you get out of the room while this unit

is in the automatic setup procedure. Keep quiet when you

leave the room. The necessary time for the automatic setup

procedure may differ depending on the environment of the

listening room and connected speakers (from 30 seconds

to 3 minutes).

To stop the automatic setup procedure and set this unit to the

pause mode, press one of the cursor buttons (4k / n / l /

h) or 4ENTER. In the pause mode, press 4k to retry the

procedure, and 4

l to cancel the Auto Setup procedure.

5 Once all items are set successfully, following

display appears in the GUI screen.

•Press 4n and select “Setup” to set the measured

values.

•Press 4k and select “Retry” to retry the automatic

setup procedure. This unit starts the automatic

setup procedure immediately again.

•Press 4h and select “Detail” to view information

about measurement results and warning messages.

In the information display, press 4k / n

repeatedly to toggle between the parameters. For

more details about warning messages, see the

“Auto Setup” section in “Troubleshooting” on

page 135.

•Press 4l and select “Exit” to exit from the Auto

Setup procedure. If you select “Exit”, “Don’t

Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured

values and exit, select “Setup”. To cancel the

settings and exit, select “Cancel”.

If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually

adjust each parameter, set the parameters in “Basic” (see

page 91).

• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of

your listening environment, run “Auto Setup” again to

recalibrate your system.

• The distances displayed in the “Distance” results may be

longer than the actual distance depending on the

characteristics of your subwoofer or external amplifiers if

you connect them.

• In the “Equalizing” results, different values may be set for

the same band to provide finer adjustments.

Before proceeding next operation

Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts

the automatic setup procedure immediately. For the

accurate measurements, once you perform the next

operation, we recommend that you get out of the room

or move to the position where you do not interrupt the

accurate measurements (for example, along the wall

with no speakers installed nearby).

Notes

Optimizer microphone

Notes

✓

Equalizing

Level

Result

Retry

Exit Detail

Setup

Measurement Over

Successfully

39 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

PREPARATION

English

6 Press

SET MENU to exit from the GUI

screen.

• After you have completed the automatic setup procedure, be

sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone.

• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away

from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.

■ Customizing the measurements

You can select the parametric equalizer type, and activate

or deactivate each check items.

1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to this unit and place the microphone

appropriately.

Refer to the steps 1 to 3 of “Basic procedure” on page

41.

2 Press

k to select “Setup Menu” and then

“Setup Menu” is selected as the currently selected

menu item.

3 Press

k / n repeatedly to select “Wiring”,

“Distance”, “Size”, “Equalizing”, or “Level”,

and then press

h to set the selected

parameter.

4 Press

k / n repeatedly to select the desired

parameter and then

ENTER to confirm the

selection.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you set all the

desired parameters.

This unit performs the following checks:

Wiring (Speaker wiring)

Checks which speakers are connected and the

polarity of each speaker.

Distance (Speaker distance)

Checks the distance of each speaker from the

listening position and adjusts the timing of each

channel.

Size (Speaker size)

Checks the frequency response of each speaker and

sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each

channel.

Choices: Check, Skip

• Select “Check” to automatically check and adjust

the item.

• Select “Skip” to skip the item and perform no

adjustments.

Equalizing (Parametric equalizer level)

Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified

frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the

crucial frequency bands for the listening room and

adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to

create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can

select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment

from the following choices.

Choices: Check:Natural, Check:Flat, Check:Front,

Skip

• Select “Check:Natural” to average out the

frequency response of all speakers with higher

frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended

if the “Check:Flat” setting sounds a little harsh.

• Select “Check:Flat” to average the frequency

response of all speakers. Recommended if all of

your speakers are of similar quality.

• Select “Check:Front” to adjust the frequency

response of each speaker in accordance with the

sound of your front speakers. Recommended if

your front speakers are of much higher quality than

your other speakers.

• Select “Skip” to skip the selected item and perform

no adjustments.

Level (Volume level)

Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.

Choices: Check, Skip

• Select “Check” to automatically check and adjust

this item.

• Select “Skip” to skip this item and perform no

adjustments.

A check mark appears at the left of the parameter you set

other then “Skip”.

If warning message appears...

When this unit detects potential problems during

the automatic setup procedure, warning messages

appears in the result display. See the “Auto Setup”

section in “Troubleshooting” on page 135 for a

complete list of warning messages and proper

remedies.

Notes

✓

Equalizing

Level

Result

Retry

Exit Detail

Setup

Measurement Over

W1:Out of Phase

W3:Level Error

Warning messages

40 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

6 Once you have selected the desired settings

of each parameter, press

l to return to the

previous menu level and then press

n to

select “Start”.

7 After the setting of the measurement, start

the automatic setup procedure.

Refer to steps 4 to 6 of “Basic procedure of the

automatic setup” on page 37 for details.

■ Reviewing the result of the automatic

setup

Use this feature to review the result of the automatic setup.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU to turn on the

GUI screen.

2 Press 4k / n repeatedly and then 4h to

select “Auto Setup”.

3 Press 4k to select “Information”.

4 Press 4h and then 4n repeatedly to select

the desired check items.

Wiring (Speaker wiring)

Displays the polarity of each connected speaker.

• “NRM” appears when the polarity of the connected

speaker is normal.

• “REV” appears when the polarity of the connected

speaker is reversed.

“–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the

corresponding speaker channel.

Distance (Speaker distance)

Displays the speaker distance from the listening

position. Press 4l / h to switch the unit to display

the value of the each speaker distance.

“–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the

corresponding speaker channel.

Size (Speaker size)

Displays the size of the connected speakers. The bass

cross over frequency (“Cross”) appears at the bottom

of the menu area.

• “LRG” appears when the connected speaker has

the ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals

effectively.

• “SML” appears when the connected speaker does

not have the ability to reproduce the low-frequency

signals effectively.

“–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the

corresponding speaker channel.

Equalizing (Speaker equalizing)

Displays the result of the adjustment of the frequency

responses of each connected speaker.

“–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the

corresponding speaker channel.

Level (speaker level)

Displays the speaker output level of the connected

speakers.

“–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the

corresponding speaker channel.

System Memory feature

You can save multiple result of the automatic setup by using

the System Memory feature. See page 100 for details.

Input Select

Manual Setup

Auto Setup

System Memory

Signal Info.

Information

Setup Menu

Start

Information

Setup Menu

Start

Wiring

Distance

Size

Wiring

Distance

Size

Left Right

Front NRM NRM

Center NRM

Sur. NRM NRM

S.Back NRM NRM

PRNS NRM NRM

SubWfr NRM

Reload:ENTER

Note

PLAYBACK

41 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

• You can control this unit by using the graphical user

interface (GUI) screen. See page 44 for details.

• You can turn on or off the short message displays on the

video monitor. See page 90 for details.

2 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or set the

operation mode selector to

AMP and then

press one of the input selector buttons (1))

to select the desired input source.

The name of the currently selected input source

appears in the front panel display and in the short

message display for a few seconds.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

• Refer to the instruction manuals for the source

component.

• See page 53 for details about FM/AM tuning

instructions.

• See page 56 for details about XM Satellite Radio

tuning instruction.

• See page 62 for details about the iPod operation

with this unit.

• See page 64 for details about playback of Internet

Radio programs and the music contents in the PC

or USB memory devices.

Rotate

VOLUME

(or press

VOLUME +/–

)

to adjust the volume to the desired output level.

Control range: Mute, –80.0 dB (minimum) to

+16.5 dB (maximum)

See page 52 to adjust the level of each speaker.

5 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector on the

front panel (or press one of the sound field

program selector buttons (O) repeatedly) to

select the desired sound field program.

The name of the selected sound field program appears

in the front panel display and in the short message

display. See page 45 for details about sound field

programs.

Sound field programs cannot be selected when the

component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is

selected as the input source (see page 42).

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, not merely on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically

selects the last sound field program used with the

corresponding input source.

Playback

Caution

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play

back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD

encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,

you will only hear some unwanted noise that may

damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player

supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound

output level of your CD player before you play back a

CD encoded in DTS.

To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio

connection, set “Decoder Mode” in “Input Select” to “DTS”

before playback (see page 82).

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Basic procedure

CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH

TUNER

MD/TAPE

BD/HD DVD

DVD

DVR

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX

NET/USB

DVD

Currently selected input source

Available input sources

Note

Movie

Sci-Fi

Currently selected sound field program

Currently selected sound field program category

42 En

Playback

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this

feature (audio input jack select) to switch the input jack

assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are

assigned to an input source.

• We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO”

in most cases.

• You can adjust the default the audio input jack select of this unit

by using “Audio Select” in “Option” (see page 98).

• You can also set the audio input jack select setting in “Audio

Select” in “Input Select” (see page 82).

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (1)) to select

the desired input source.

2 Press

AUDIO SELECT (or

AUDIO

SEL) repeatedly to select the desired Audio

input jack select setting.

This feature is not available when no digital input jack

(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. Use “I/O

Assignment” in “Input Select” to reassign the respective input

jack (see page 82).

Use this feature to select the component connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 29) as the input

source.

Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front panel

to select MULTI CH (or press

MULTI CH IN).

Use “MULTI CH” menu in “Input Select” to set the parameters

for MULTI CH (see page 83).

Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer mode

cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI

CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 45).

Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo

analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on

the front panel.

When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode

activates automatically (see page 50).

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

speaker terminals.

• When the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks of this unit is selected as the input source, only the signals

input at the MULTI CH INPUT FRONT jacks are output from

the connected headphones.

• All digital multi-channel audio signals (except DSD signals) are

mixed down to the left and right headphone channels.

Selecting audio input jacks

(AUDIO SELECT)

AUTO

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) HDMI

(2) Digital signals

(3) Analog signals

HDMI

Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI

signals are not input, no sound is output.

COAX/OPT

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack.

(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack.

When no signals are input, no sound is output.

ANALOG

Selects only analog signals. If no analog

signals are input, no sound is output.

Note

CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH

TUNER

MD/TAPE

BD/HD DVD

DVD

DVR

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX

NET/USB

A.SEL: AUTO

Currently selected Audio

input jack select setting

Available input sources

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

component

Note

Using your headphones

Notes

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

SLEEP

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

REC OUT/

ZONE2

PROGRAM

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

USB

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

FM/AM

PRESET/

TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

MULTI ZONE

YPAO

43 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Press

MUTE on the remote control to mute the

audio output. Press

MUTE again to resume

the audio output.

• You can also rotate

VOLUME on the front panel or press

VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio

output.

• You can adjust the muting level by using the “Muting Type”

parameter in “Volume” (see page 84).

• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the

audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel

display when the audio output is resumed.

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Press the input selector buttons (1) to select a

video source and then an audio source.

Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH” menu to the

desired setting to select the default background video input source

of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 83).

Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 32).

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (1)) to select

the desired input source.

2 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

Refer to the operating instructions for the source

component.

See page 53 for details about tuning instructions.

3 Press

SLEEP (or

SLEEP) repeatedly to

set the amount of time.

Each time you press

SLEEP (or

SLEEP), the

front panel display changes as shown below.

The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching

the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep

timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front

panel display, and the display returns to the selected

sound field program.

■ Canceling the sleep timer

Press

SLEEP (or

SLEEP) repeatedly until

“SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display.

The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”

disappears from the front panel display after a few

seconds.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

MAIN

ZONE ON/OFF (or

STANDBY) to set the main zone to the

standby mode.

Muting the audio output

Playing video sources in the

background of an audio source

Using the sleep timer

SLEEP 120min. SLEEP 90min.

SLEEP 60min.SLEEP 30min.SLEEP OFF

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min.

Flashes

SLEEP

STRAIGHT

Lights up

SLEEP OFF

Disappears

44 En

Playback

This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) screen that helps you to control the amplifier function of

this unit. With the GUI screen, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. You can

also set up this unit using the GUI screen (see page 73).

■ Items in GUI screen

• Set the operation mode selector to

AMP when you operate this unit by using GUI screen.

• See page 73 for details about the contents in the menu area.

• This unit reserves the previously selected GUI screen.

■ Basic controls in the GUI screen

Operating the amplifier functions of this unit by using the graphical user

interface (GUI) screen

DVD

Manual Setu

-40.0dB

qPLIIx Movie Sci-Fi

Currently selected decoder

Currently selected

sound field program

Menu area

Currently selected

input source

Currently selected

menu item

Current menu directory

Volume level

(see page 41)

Stereo/Surround

Input Select

Manual Setup

Auto Setup

System Memory

Sound

Video

Basic

NET/USB

Option

button feature

4 Cursor k / n

Press to select the item in the current menu

level.

4 Cursor h

Press to select the currently selected menu

item and move to the next menu level.

4 Cursor l

Press to return to the previous menu level.

4 ENTER

Press to select the currently selected menu

item and move to the next menu level.

G SET MENU

Press to display or turn off the GUI screen.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

45 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing

(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

• The Yamaha CINEMA DSP sound field program are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Surround, Dolby TrueHD, and

DTS-HD Master Audio sources.

• The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from

the front, back, left and right.

Rotate the

PROGRAM selector (or set the

operation mode selector to

AMP and then

press one of the sound field selector buttons (O)

repeatedly).

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display and in the short message display.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with the corresponding input

source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 42) or when this unit is in the Pure Direct

mode (see page 51).

• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field

program, this unit applies the selected program without

activating the DTS 96/24 decoder.

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to

48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.

You can select the desired sound field programs and setting the

parameters by using GUI screen. See page 74 for details.

Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.

Sound field programs

Selecting sound field programs

Notes

Sound field program descriptions

Sound field indicators

Sci-Fi

MOVIE

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can

enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background

music.

Available sound field parameters (see page 76)

Program description

Remote control

button

Name of the

program

Created sound

fields

CINEMA DSP

HiFi DSP

Category of the

program

Decoder Type Init. Delay Sur. Init. Delay SB. Init. Delay Dialogue Lift

DSP Level Room Size Sur. Room Size SB. Room Size

Presence sound field

Listening position

Surround left

sound field

Surround right

sound field

Surround back sound field

46 En

Sound field programs

■ For audio music sources

For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 51), the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 50) or

surround decode mode (see page 71).

CLASSICAL Hall in Munich

This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal

standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is

at the center left of the arena.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Liveness

Dialogue Lift

CLASSICAL Hall in Vienna

This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Liveness

Dialogue Lift

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

CLASSICAL

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2200 around the circle stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Liveness

Dialogue Lift

CLASSICAL

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the

high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself

reproduces the atmosphere of the church.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Liveness

Rev. Time

Rev. Delay

Rev. Level

Dialogue Lift

CLASSICAL Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are

suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Liveness

Rev. Time

Rev. Delay

Rev. Level

Dialogue Lift

LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage

located in the corner.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Liveness

Dialogue Lift

LIVE/CLUB Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Liveness

Rev. Time

Rev. Delay

Rev. Level

Dialogue Lift

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

47 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ For various sources

The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club

This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the

listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Liveness

Dialogue Lift

LIVE/CLUB The Roxy Theatre

This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left

of the hall.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Liveness

Rev. Time

Rev. Delay

Rev. Level

Dialogue Lift

LIVE/CLUB The Bottom Line

This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in

a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Liveness

Dialogue Lift

Note

ENTERTAINMENT Sports

This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts,

the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an

optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Sur. Init. Delay

Sur. Room Size

SB. Init. Delay

SB. Room Size

Dialogue Lift

ENTERTAINMENT Action Game

This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per

channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a

clear sense of directions.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Sur. Init. Delay

Sur. Room Size

SB. Init. Delay

SB. Room Size

Dialogue Lift

ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game

This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field design

used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the

movie scenes in the game.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Sur. Init. Delay

Sur. Room Size

SB. Init. Delay

SB. Room Size

Dialogue Lift

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

48 En

Sound field programs

■ For visual sources of music

The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

■ For movie sources

You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 71 for details.

The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

Note

ENTERTAINMENT Music Video

This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot

live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to

the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Sur. Init. Delay

Sur. Room Size

SB. Init. Delay

SB. Room Size

Dialogue Lift

ENTERTAINMENT Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices. “Opera”

offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of

presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent

beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Sur. Init. Delay

Sur. Room Size

SB. Init. Delay

SB. Room Size

Dialogue Lift

Note

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE Standard

This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel

audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded

by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.

Decoder Type

DSP Level

Sur. Init. Delay

Sur. Room Size

Sur. Liveness

SB. Init. Delay

SB Room Size

SB Liveness

Dialogue Lift

MOVIE Spectacle

This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the

cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.

Decoder Type

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Sur. Init. Delay

Sur. Room Size

SB. Init. Delay

SB. Room Size

Dialogue Lift

MOVIE

MOVIE Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can

enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background

music.

Decoder Type

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Sur. Init. Delay

Sur. Room Size

SB. Init. Delay

SB. Room Size

Dialogue Lift

MOVIE

49 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Stereo playback

■ The Compressed Music Enhancer

MOVIE Adventure

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but

puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to

ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.

Decoder Type

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Sur. Init. Delay

Sur. Room Size

SB. Init. Delay

SB. Room Size

Dialogue Lift

MOVIE

MOVIE Drama

This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear

words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.

Decoder Type

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Sur. Init. Delay

Sur. Room Size

SB. Init. Delay

SB. Room Size

Dialogue Lift

MOVIE

MOVIE Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The

program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth.

DSP Level

Init. Delay

Room Size

Liveness

Rev. Time

Rev. Level

Rev. Delay

Dialogue Lift

STEREO 2ch STEREO

Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 52 for details.

Direct

MOVIE

STEREO

STEREO 7ch STEREO

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2

channels, and then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties,

etc.

Center Level

Surround L Level

Surround R Level

Sur. Back Level

Presence L Level

Presence R Level

MUSIC ENHANCER Straight Enhancer

Use this program to improve the sound enhancer nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel compression

artifacts.

Level

STEREO

HiFi DSP

ENHANCER

MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer

Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.

Level

ENHANCER

50 En

Sound field programs

■ Using sound field programs without

surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs without surround

speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the

natural sound field.

When you set “Surround” to

“None” (see page 92), Virtual

CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you

select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program

(see page 45).

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “Surround” is

set to “None” (see page 92) in the following cases:

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is selected as the input source (see page 42).

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

– when this unit is in the “7ch stereo” mode.

■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and

sound field programs with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound through ordinary headphones.

SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you

connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening

to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see

page 45). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 42).

• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see

page 51) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 52) is selected, or

when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode.

CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and

accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.

You can activate and deactivate the CINEMA DSP 3D

mode.

Press

3D DSP repeatedly to turn on and off

the CINEMA DSP 3D mode.

• “3D:ON” appears in the front panel display and the 3D

indicator (see page 36) lights up while this unit is in the

CINEMA DSP 3D mode. CINEMA DSP 3D mode

creates the intensive and stereoscopic sound field in the

listening room.

• “3D:OFF” appears in the front panel display and the

3D indicator disappears when the CINEMA DSP 3D

mode is turned off. Conventional CINEMA DSP mode

creates the large and expanding sound field in the

listening room.

• “3D:––” appears when the CINEMA DSP 3D mode is not

available.

• If you set “Presence” to “None”, this unit cannot activate the

CINEMA DSP 3D mode.

• This unit activates the CINEMA DSP 3D mode only when you

select one of the CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field

programs.

• When your headphones are connected to this unit, this unit

cannot activate the CINEMA DSP 3D mode.

When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel

stereo sources are output from only the front left and right

speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into

the appropriate channels without any additional effect

processing.

You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by using GUI screen.

See page 74 for details.

Press

STRAIGHT (or

STRAIGHT) to select

“STRAIGHT”.

The names of the audio signal format of the input source and the

active decoder appear in the front panel display.

■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode

Press

STRAIGHT (or

STRAIGHT) so that

“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel

display.

The sound effect is turned back on.

You can also select desired sound field program by rotating the

PROGRAM selector (or press one of the desired sound field

program buttons (O)) repeatedly.

Note

Notes

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode

Notes

Enjoying unprocessed input

sources

STRAIGHT

USING AUDIO FEATURES

51 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound

of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is

activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the

least circuitry.

Press

PURE DIRECT (or

PURE DIRECT)

to turn on or off the Pure Direct mode.

The

PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up

and the front panel display automatically turns off while

this unit is in the Pure Direct mode.

• When this unit is in the Pure Direct mode, this unit does not

output any video signals at the MONITOR OUT jacks and the

HDMI OUT jack.

• When you set Audio input jack selects to “AUTO”, “HDMI”, or

“COAX/OPT” (see page 42) and play back the bitstreams or

multi-channel PCM sources, this unit activates the

corresponding decoder.

• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in

the Pure Direct mode:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the GUI screen

– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)

• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this

unit is turned off.

The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation

is performed.

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for

the front L/R and center speaker channels and the

subwoofer channel.

1 Press

TONE CONTROL on the front

panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency

response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency

response (BASS).

2 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to adjust

the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or

the low-frequency response (BASS).

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the

low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of

the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and

center speakers and the subwoofer.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is

selected, or when MULTI CH is selected as the input source.

Use “Tone Control” parameter in “Sound” menu to adjust the

balance of bass and treble output to your speakers or headphones

by using GUI screen. See page 86 for details.

Using audio features

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound

Notes

Adjusting the tonal quality

Notes

52 En

Using audio features

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

This operation will override the level adjustments made in “Auto

Setup” (see page 37) and “Speaker Level” (see page 94).

Press

LEVEL

on the front panel repeatedly

to select the speaker you want to adjust.

• Once you press

LEVEL on the remote control, you can

also select the speaker by pressing 4k / n.

• Instead of “SB R” and “SB L”, “SB” is displayed if

“Surround Back” is set to either “Small x1” or “Large x1”

(see page 92).

2 Press 4l / h to adjust the speaker output

level.

• Press 4h to increase the value.

• Press 4l to decrease the value.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels

and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.

Press

STEREO on the remote control

repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.

• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “Bass Out” is

set to “SWFR” or “Both” (see page 92).

• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the

PROGRAM selector on the front panel.

• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode and adjust the

parameter by using GUI screen. See page 74 for details.

• See page 79 for details about the parameters of the “2ch Stereo”

mode.

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Adjusting the speaker level

Note

Display Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

SUR. R

Surround right speaker

SB R

Surround back right speaker

SB L

Surround back left speaker

SUR. L

Surround left speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

PRNS L

Presence left speaker

PRNS R

Presence right speaker

Enjoying multi-channel sources in

2-channel stereo

FM/AM TUNING

53 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and

there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use

the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of

the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset

stations with each other.

Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front

panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Press

FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press

TUNING MODE so that the AUTO

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press

PRESET/TUNING to turn

the colon (:) off.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once

to begin automatic tuning.

When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up and the frequency of the received

station is shown in the front panel display.

• Press

h to tune into a higher frequency.

• Press

l to tune into a lower frequency.

If the signal received from the station you want to select is

weak, tune into it manually.

Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the

tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front

panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Press

FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press

TUNING MODE so that the AUTO

indicator disappears from the front panel

display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press

PRESET/TUNING to turn

the colon (:) off.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to

tune into the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to continue searching.

FM/AM tuning

Note

Automatic tuning

AUTO

A FM 88.9 MHz

Lights upNo colon (:)

Manual tuning

Note

A FM 88.9 MHz

No colon (:)

54 En

FM/AM tuning

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up

to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in

order. You can then recall any preset station easily by

selecting the preset station number.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front

panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Press

FM/AM to select “FM” as the

reception band.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press and hold

MEMORY for more than 3

seconds.

The preset station number as well as the AUTO and

MEMORY indicators flashes. After approximately 10

seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current

frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• You can specify the preset number from which this unit

stores FM stations. Press

A/B/C/D/E and then

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly after you

perform step 3 to select the preset station number under

which the first station will be stored.

• You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store FM

stations automatically. Press

PRESET/TUNING

so that

the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and

then press

PRESET/TUNING/CH

after pressing and

holding

MEMORY

for more than 3 seconds.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station

number is cleared when you store a new station under the

same preset station number.

• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning automatically stops after

searching for all the available stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station

you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it

manually and store it as described in “Manual preset

tuning”.

• (Europe model only) Only Radio Data System

broadcasting station are stored automatically by automatic

preset tuning.

You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)

manually.

1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.

See page 53 for tuning instructions.

2 Press

MEMORY.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 10 seconds.

3 Press

A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a

preset station group (A to E) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The selected preset station group letter appears.

Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel

display.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to

select a preset station number (1 to 8) while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing.

•Press

h to select a higher preset station number.

•Press

l to select a lower preset station number.

Automatic preset tuning

Notes

AUTO

MEMORY

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

Flashes Flashes

Manual preset tuning

MEMORY

Flashes

MEMORY

A :FM 88.9 MHz

Preset station group

FlashesColon (:)

MEMORY

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

Preset station number

Flashes

55 En

FM/AM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

5 Press

MEMORY while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The station band and frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset station group and

number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator

disappears from the front panel display.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station

number is cleared when you store a new station under the

same preset station number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along

with the station frequency.

You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting

the preset station group and number under which it was

stored.

1 Press

A/B/C/D/E (or

A-E/CAT. l / h) to

select the desired preset station group (A to

E).

The preset station group letter appears in the front

panel display and changes each time you press the

button.

2 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired

preset station number (1 to 8).

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display along with the station band and

frequency.

You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” using

A/B/C/D/E

and

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel.

See “Selecting preset stations” on left column.

2 Press and hold

EDIT for more than 3

seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” using

A/B/C/D/

E and

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

See “Selecting preset stations” on left column.

4 Press

EDIT again.

“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and

the assignments of the two preset stations are

exchanged.

Notes

Selecting preset stations

Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then

press

TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

The displayed station has been stored as A1.

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

Exchanging preset stations

MEMORY

E1:FM 88.9 MHz

FlashesFlashes

MEMORY

A5:FM 88.9 MHz

Flashes

EDIT E1-A5

XM™ SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

56 En

XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk and

entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip

hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its

passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and much

more.

The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.

■ Enjoying XM HD Surround content

This unit is equipped with the Neural-THX Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the

XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience (see page 72).

Connect XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (each sold

separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit.

For information on your XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock,

see the operating instructions provided with XM Mini-

Tuner Dock.

• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,

the antenna of Home Dock must be placed at or near a south-

facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can

mount it indoors or outdoors.

• Use the “Antenna Level” parameter of “XM” in “Input Select”

(see page 81) to display the XM Satellite Radio reception level

on the video monitor. For the best reception, adjust the

orientation of the antenna of connected Home Dock so that a

value of 60% or more is displayed.

If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display,

Home Dock may not be connected to the XM jack on the rear

panel of this unit properly.

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning

XM Satellite Radio online information

For U.S. customers: http://www.xmradio.com/

For Canadian customers: http://www.xmradio.ca/

Note

XM READY

legal disclaimer

Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply.

Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are

indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and 1-877-

GET-XMSR (Canadian residents). For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels and advertising-supported channels, visit

lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or www.xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement

available at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Service only available in the 48 contiguous United

owners.

Connecting the XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock

XM Mini-Tuner and

XM Home Dock (sold separately)

Note

57 En

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Checking your XM Radio ID

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock,

inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the Home Dock to

your XM Ready home audio system, and installed the

antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving

XM programming. There are three places to find your

eight character XM Radio ID: on the XM Mini-Tuner, on

the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0 (see

page 58). Record the Radio ID in the following eight

squares for reference.

The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.

■ Subscription of your XM Satellite Radio

service

For U.S. customers

URL: http://www.xmradio.com/

Phone: 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)

For Canadian customers

URL: http://www.xmradio.ca/

Phone (XM’s Listener Care):

1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)

You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the

satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally

takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may

need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an

hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on your XM

Ready home audio system you are done.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press

XM) to select “XM” as the input source.

The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in

the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio

information (such as channel number, channel name,

category, artist name, or song title) for the currently

selected channel appears in the front panel display.

When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the

AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” on page 58.

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” on page 58.

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” on page 58.

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct Number Access

mode” on page 58.

• You can use the Neural-THX Surround decoder to enjoy

the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite

Radio broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 72).

• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see

page 59).

• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the

front panel display or in the OSD (see page 60).

Activating

XM™ Satellite Radio

Note

Basic

XM™ Satellite Radio

operations

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

SOURCE.

Note

CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH

TUNER

MD/TAPE

BD/HD DVD

DVD

NET/USB

DVR

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX

[001] Preview

Lights up

58 En

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within all channels.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and

holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n).

■ Category Search mode

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within the selected channel

category.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and

holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n).

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For

details, see “Setting the XM™ Satellite Radio preset

channels” on page 59.

The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is

“[001] Preview”.

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET

SEARCH”.

2 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the preset channel

group (A to E).

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change

the preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by

pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.

■ Direct Number Access mode

1 Press

SRCH MODE on the remote control

repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or

“CAT SEARCH”.

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

SOURCE and then

press 1XM.

ALL CH SEARCH

CAT SEARCH

PRESET SEARCH

ALL CH SEARCH

CAT SEARCH

59 En

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

2 Press the numeric buttons (6) on the remote

control to enter the desired three-digit

channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons as shown below.

The display changes as follows.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the

numeric buttons (

) on the remote control and then press

ENT to confirm the input number.

• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a

one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms

the entered channel number.

• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (

) or

ENT

cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.

• If you enter the number 0, this unit displays your XM Radio ID

(see page 57).

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall

any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel

group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”

on page 58.

1 Search for a channel you want to set as a

preset channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

2 Press

MEMORY (or

MEMORY).

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 5 seconds.

You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel

display.

3 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to select a preset channel group

(A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The preset channel group letter appears in the front

panel display.

<XM> --1

<XM> -12

<XM>123

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

SOURCE and then

press 1XM.

Setting the XM™ Satellite Radio

preset channels

Note

[043] XMU

Currently selected channel number

MEMORY

Flashes

MEMORY

C [043] XMU

Currently selected preset channel group Flashes

60 En

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select a

preset channel number (1 to 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The preset channel number appears in the front panel

display.

5 Press

MEMORY (or

MEMORY) to set

the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a

preset channel while the MEMORY indicator

is flashing.

A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number

for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns

off in the front panel display.

Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously

stored in the same preset channel group and number is

cleared.

You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such

as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,

or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front

panel display or on the video monitor.

If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel

display or on the video monitor, see the “XM Satellite Radio

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)” section in “Troubleshooting”

on page 127 for appropriate remedies.

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display

Press

DISPLAY (or

DISPLAY) repeatedly to

toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio

information display modes.

When the channel number / name is displayed:

When the channel category is displayed:

When the artist name / song title is displayed:

• You can set the front panel display mode by using the “Scroll”

parameter in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 96).

• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that

cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be

displayed with a space.

Note

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

SOURCE and then

press 1XM.

Displaying the XM™ Satellite

Radio information

Note

MEMORY

C5 [043] XMU

Currently selected preset channel number

Flashes

C5: [043] XMU

Colon (:)

Channel number / name

Channel category

Artist name / Song title

[043] XMU

<CAT>Rock

< C A T > R o c k X

<CAT>Rock

< C A T > R o c k X

<CAT>Rock

< C A T > R o c k X

<CAT>Rock

< C A T > R o c k X

Coldplay / Spe

61 En

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information on the video monitor

Press

DISPLAY or (

DISPLAY).

The following information screen is displayed on the

video monitor.

• To turn off the displayed information screen, press

DISPLAY (or

DISPLAY).

• You can set the time for which the XM Satellite Radio

information is displayed on the video monitor by using the “On

Screen” parameter in “Manual Setup” (see page 90).

• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press

ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed on

the video monitor.

• The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released

if you press

ENTER on the remote control again or if you

change the XM Satellite Radio channel.

• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information

screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM

Satellite Radio information screens, press

TITLE on the

remote control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio

information screen is being hold.

XM Information

All CH Search

CH NUMBER 043

CH NAME XMU

CATEGORY Rock

NAME Coldplay

TITLE Speed of sound

Hold : ENTER

USING IPOD™

62 En

Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 30), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.

You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to enhance the sound quality of the compression

artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 49).

• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and on the video monitor, see the “iPod” section in

“Troubleshooting” on page 135.

• Once your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal

of this unit, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod.

• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold

separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges

the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “Standby Charge” parameter in “iPod”

(see page 96).

• While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 35) appears in the

front panel display. Once the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears.

You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as

the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done

with the aid of the GUI screen of this unit (menu browse

mode) or without it (simple remote mode).

■ Remote control operation

■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote

mode

You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,

stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without

the aid of the GUI screen of this unit.

• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.

• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.

■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse

mode

You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod

using the supplied remote control with the aid of the GUI

screen of this unit. The name of the song being played

appears in the front panel display according to the “Scroll”

parameter in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 96). You can

also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the GUI

screen. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your

iPod to suit your personal preferences.

• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.

• The Yamaha logo appears in the display window of your iPod.

• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front

panel display or in the GUI screen of this unit. Those characters

are replaced with underscores “_”.

• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your

iPod in the GUI screen. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy

watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.

• You can set the time for which the GUI screen of iPod is

displayed on the video monitor by using the “On Screen”

parameter in “Manual Setup” (see page 90).

Using iPod™

Notes

Controlling iPod™

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

SOURCE and then

press 1V-AUX/DOCK.

Button Function

4 ENTER Subsequent menu

k Menu up

n Menu down

l Previous menu

h Subsequent menu

7 ll Search backward (Press and hold)

Search forward

(Press and hold)

a Skip forward

b Skip backward

s Stop

e Pause (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

p Play (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

G MENU Previous menu

J DISPLAY Display

Notes

63 En

Using iPod™

BASIC

OPERATION

English

1 Press

DISPLAY on the remote control.

The following display appears in the video monitor.

2 Press

k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod

menu and then press

ENTER to begin

playback of the selected song.

Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists),

Albums (albums), Songs (songs),

Genres (genres), Composers (composers),

Settings (settings)

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat

Shuffle (Shuffle)

Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in

random order.

Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random

order.

• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in

random order.

• When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ”

appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being

shuffled.

• Press 4ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of

“Shuffle”.

Repeat (Repeat)

Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

Choices: Off, One, All

• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.

• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of

songs.

• When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or

“ ” appears in the top right corner while one song or a

sequence of songs are being repeated.

• Press 4ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of

“Repeat”.

■ The functions of the play information

display

1 Track number/total tracks

2 Name of the album

3 Name of the song

4 Elapsed time

5 (playback), (pausing), (search forward) or

(search backward)

6 Shuffle and repeat icons

7 Name of the artist

8 Progress bar

9 Remaining time

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

SOURCE and then

press 1V-AUX/DOCK.

Notes

Top

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Composers

Settings

Notes

0:51 -7:44

Play Information

Road to India

Made-to-order

Frankie Zipper

1/9

USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES

64 En

This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA

files saved on your PC, Yamaha MCX-2000, USB memory device and USB portable audio player or access the Internet

Radio.

• Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.

• For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical

reference books, if needed.

• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played.

• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control the network and USB features, refer to the “Remote control

operation” on page 65.

• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and on the video monitor, see the “Network and USB”

section in “Troubleshooting” on page 132.

The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu.

* Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed.

Using Network/USB features

Notes

Navigating the network and USB menus

Note

NET/USB

PC/MusicCAST

(MCX-2000)

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Popular Stations

New Stations

USB

Recall Play

Server* Playlists

Internet Radio

Files/Directories

Help

Locations

Podcasts

Bookmarks

Genres

Selects a song by playlist stored on the server. Refer to the documents of

the server for details about the playlist file format, the process of creating

the playlist file, etc.

Makes this unit recall play from MCX-2000 or another client. For details,

refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000.

Selects a song by genre. In addition, you can select an album within the

genre (MCX-2000 only).

Selects a song by album.

Selects a song by artist. In addition, you can select an album within the

artist (MCX-2000 only).

Selects an Internet Radio station that has been added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 67).

Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by location.

Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service.

Selects a file by navigating directories.

Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by genre.

Selects an Internet Radio station from the ones that have recently started the service.

Selects an Internet Radio station from the list of popular stations.

Selects a Podcast service by location or genre.

Selects a song directly.

65 En

Using Network/USB features

BASIC

OPERATION

English

The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate

the network and USB menus. See pages 66 to 68 for

details about each sub input source.

“Please wait” may appear whenever it takes time for

communication. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a

while.

1 Press

NET/USB on the remote control to

select “NET/USB” as the input source.

The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator

lights up in the front panel display, and the contents

previously played for the corresponding sub input

source of NET/USB is automatically played.

2 Press

DISPLAY to display the top NET/

USB menu.

The following display appears on the video monitor.

If any other screen appears on the video monitor,

press

MENU on the remote control repeatedly

until the top NET/USB menu appears.

3 Press

k / n to select the desired sub input

source and then press

h or

ENTER.

You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing

NET RADIO,

USB or

PC/MCX when “NET/

USB” is selected as the input source. This unit automatically

starts playback of the last selected music file, Internet Radio

station, or Podcast when you press

NET RADIO,

USB or

PC/MCX.

4 Press 4k / n / l / h to select the desired

song or Internet Radio station.

•Press 4k / n to select the desired menu.

•Press 4h to enter the selected menu.

•Press 4l to return to the previous menu level.

• “>” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that

there is a submenu available in the next menu level.

• You can also press 4ENTER or

MENU to enter the

selected menu or to return to the previous menu level.

5 Press

ENTER to play the selected song or

to listen to the selected station.

• See page 63 for details about the functions of the play

information display.

• Some items do not appear in the play information display

depending on the selected sub input source.

• You can set the time for which the GUI screen of the

network/USB is displayed on the video monitor by using

the “On Screen” parameter in “Manual Setup” (see

page 90).

■ Remote control operation

*1 Press and hold to store your favorite Internet Radio stations

with bookmarks (see page 67).

*2 Press to assign or recall the preset items (see page 68).

Note

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

SOURCE.

CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH

TUNER

MD/TAPE

BD/HD DVD

DVD

NET/USB

DVR

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX

Lights up

Top

PC/MusicCAST

Internet Radio

USB

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

SOURCE and then

press 1NET/USB.

Button Function

3 TITLE

Bookmark

4 k Up

n Down

l Previous menu

h Subsequent menu

5 MEMORY Memory

6 1 – 8

Numeric buttons (1-8)

7 NET RADIO Select “NET RADIO”

USB Select “USB”

b Skip backward (“PC/MCX” and “USB” only)

a Skip forward (“PC/MCX” and “USB” only)

PC/MCX Select “PC/MCX”

s Stop

p Play

G MENU Previous menu

J DISPLAY Display

66 En

Using Network/USB features

Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or

Yamaha MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that

enhances the concept of Yamaha exclusive MusicCAST, a

digital music delivery method over a personal network.

1 Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC,

or register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-

2000.

• Refer to “Installing Windows Media Player 11 on

your PC” and “Registering this unit on the Yamaha

MCX-2000” on page 67.

• This procedure is needed only the first time.

• (PC only) You may need to make some setting of

Windows Media Player 11 to start the contents

sharing. Refer to the attached documents of

Windows Media Player 11.

2 Turn on your PC or MCX-2000.

The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server

list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST.

3 Select a desired server or MusicCAST to

begin playback.

• Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.

• You can connect this unit to up to 4 PC servers and 1

MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same

subnet as this unit.

• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files on your PC may not be

playable or may be noisy when played.

• (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not

been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files

immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting

of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the

instruction manual of MCX-2000.

• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at

the bottom of the playback information screen.

• You can use 7b / a to skip backward/forward and

7h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu

on the video monitor.

• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the

“Play Style” parameters in “NET/USB” (see page 95).

• You can set the front panel display mode by using the “Scroll”

parameter in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 96).

■ Installing Windows Media Player 11 on

your PC

With Windows Media Player 11, you can play back the

audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents

of Windows Media Player 11.

You can also play back the audio files on your PC with Windows

Media Connect 2.0 installed.

1 Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.

You can download the installer of Windows Media

Player 11 from the Microsoft website, or use the

upgrade function of the installed Microsoft Windows

Media Player.

2 Turn on your PC and then share a folder on

the PC.

The Shared folder is added to the server list on the

submenu of PC/MusicCAST.

• If the operating system (OS) of your PC is Windows Vista,

Windows Media Player 11 is pre-installed (except some

products).

• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus

software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this

unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software

appropriately.

• If you are using a PC with Windows XP Professional, and the

PC is logging on to a domain, you may not be able to connect

the PC server. In such cases, log on to the local machine instead

of the domain.

Using a PC server or Yamaha

MCX-2000

Notes

67 En

Using Network/USB features

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Registering this unit on the Yamaha

MCX-2000

You must register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-2000 so

that this unit can be recognized by your Yamaha MCX-

2000. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied

with your Yamaha MCX-2000.

1 Turn off this unit.

2 Set your YAMAHA MCX-2000 to the “Auto

Config” mode.

3 Turn on this unit.

• MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the

submenu of PC/MCX.

• The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of

your Yamaha MCX-2000 (shown as CL-XXXXX),

and this completes the automatic configuration

procedure.

• The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5

digits of the MAC address of this unit. For details about MAC

address, see page 95.

• To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual

Config” mode of your Yamaha MCX-2000 (refer to the

instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then set “INITIALIZE”

in the advanced setup menu of this unit to “NETWORK” (see

page 122).

• The client control functions of MusicCAST over this unit other

than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client

title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will

stop the playback on this unit.

Use this feature to listen to Internet Radio stations. This

unit uses the vTuner Internet Radio station database

service particularly customized for this unit, providing

over 2000 radio station database. Further, you can store

your favorite stations with bookmarks.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

• Some Internet Radio stations may not be played even if they are

selected in the NET RADIO menu.

• To listen to the Internet Radio, connect this unit to your network

(see page 31).

• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will

not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is

strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem,

etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.

• You can use

h / s to start/stop playback independently

from the menu on the video monitor.

• “Podcast” is a type of the Internet Radio service, and there are a

number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The

Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops

playback when an episode of the Podcast ends.

• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access

of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure

the security settings appropriately.

■ Storing your favorite Internet Radio

stations with bookmarks

Use this feature to select your favorite Internet Radio

stations quickly.

Press and hold

TITLE on the remote control

while the selected Internet Radio station service

is being broadcast.

The stored Internet Radio station is added to the

“Bookmarks” list (see page 64).

• To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the

first level of the “Bookmarks” list and then press and hold

TITLE on the remote control.

• You can also register your favorite Internet Radio stations to this

unit by accessing the following website with the web browser

on your PC. To use this feature, you need the MAC address of

this unit as the ID number and your e-mail address to create

your personal account. Use “Information” in the “NET/USB”

menu to display the MAC address of this unit (see page 95). For

details, refer to the help information on the website.

URL: http://yradio.vtuner.com/

Notes

Using the Internet Radio

Notes

68 En

Using Network/USB features

Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3

and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or

USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on

the front panel of this unit.

• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (except USB

Hard Disc Drivers) using FAT 16 or FAT 32.

• Only the first partition is displayed in the GUI menu. You

cannot select files in other partitions.

• Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per

directory are recognized.

• Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the

requirements.

• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may

be noisy when played.

• When you connect your USB memory device or USB portable

audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay.

• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at

the bottom of the playback information screen.

• You can use

b / a to skip backward/forward and

h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu

in the OSD.

• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the

“Play Style” parameters in “NET/USB” (see page 95).

• You can set the front panel display mode by using the “Scroll”

parameter in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 96).

■ Connecting a USB memory device or a

USB potable audio player

Connect a USB jack of a USB memory device or

USB portable audio player to the USB port on the

front panel of this unit.

Use this feature to access the desired music sources (WAV,

MP3 and WMA files on the connected PC, MCX-2000 or

USB storage devices and Internet Radio stations) directly.

You can preset 8 items in each sub input sources.

■ Assigning the items to the numeric

button (1-8)

1 Press

NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as

the input source.

2 Select a desired music source you want to

assign to the numeric button (1-8) (6), and

then play back the source.

See page 65 for details.

3 Press

MEMORY.

This unit in the memory preset mode. The MEMORY

indicator flashes and following message appears in

the video monitor and front panel display.

When you do not complete each of the following steps within 10

seconds, the memory preset mode is automatically canceled. In

this case, start over from step 3.

Using a USB memory device or a

USB portable audio player

Notes

SLEEP

USB

USB memory device or USB

portable audio player

Using shortcut buttons

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

SOURCE.

MEMORY

CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH

TUNER

MD/TAPE

BD/HD DVD

DVD

NET/USB

DVR

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX

-: PC/MCX

FlashesPreset number

69 En

Using Network/USB features

BASIC

OPERATION

English

4 Press desired numeric buttons (1-8) (6).

The number of the selected numeric button appears in

the video monitor or front panel display.

5 Press

ENTER or

MEMORY to confirm

the preset.

■ Select an item by using numeric buttons

(1-8) (6)

1 Press

NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as

the input source.

2 Select the desired sub input source.

3 Press one of the numeric button (1-8) (6)

which the desired item is assigned to select

the item as the input source.

The selected preset number appears in the front panel

display, and this unit starts the playback of the source

assigned to the selected numeric button.

• “Empty Memory!” appears in the front panel display and

the short message display when you press the numeric

button (1-8) (6) to which no items are assigned.

• This unit does not recall the correct item assigned to the

selected numeric button (1-8) (6) in the following cases:

– the connected USB device is incorrect.

– the PC or MCX-2000 which stores the selected item is

turned off or disconnected from the network.

– the selected Internet Radio station is temporary

unavailable or out of service.

– the directory of the selected item has been changed.

This unit stores the relative position of the preset items in a

directory or playlist, and does not recall the correct item by

using numeric buttons (1-8) (6) if you add or delete music

files to or from the same directory or playlist as the preset

items. In such cases, preset the desired item to the numeric

buttons (1-8) (6) again.

We recommend the following methods:

PC server/MCX-2000

Create eight playlists which contain the desired items, and

then preset the top item of each playlist to the numeric

buttons (1-8) (6). When you change the items which are

preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (6), replace the

registered items in the playlist with the desired items

without deleting the playlist.

USB memory devices

Create eight directories which contain the desired items in a

directory beside the directory which contains all music files,

and then preset the top item of each directory to the numeric

buttons (1-8) (6). When you change the items which are

preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (6), replace the items in

the directory to the desired items without deleting the

directory.

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

SOURCE.

Notes

MEMORY

CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH

TUNER

MD/TAPE

BD/HD DVD

DVD

NET/USB

DVR

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX

1: PC/MCX

FlashesSelected preset number

CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH

TUNER

MD/TAPE

BD/HD DVD

DVD

NET/USB

DVR

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX

1: PC/MCX

Selected preset number

RECORDING

70 En

Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating

instructions for those components.

• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.

• TONE CONTROL (see page 51) and the volume settings, the speaker level (see page 94) and the sound field programs (see page 45)

do not affect recorded material.

• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.

• The XM Satellite Radio signals (U.S.A. and Canada models only) cannot be output at the audio OUT (REC) jacks.

• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog audio OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,

analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is

connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing

video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an

S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.

• The analog audio and video signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog audio OUT (REC) jacks and DVR or VCR

OUT jacks for recording.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright

laws.

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

1 Turn on all the connected components.

2 Press

REC OUT/ZONE2 until the

RECOUT indicator lights up in the front panel

display.

This unit in the recording source selecting mode.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM to select the source

component you want to record from.

Carry out the operation while the RECOUT indicator

is lit.

Select “SOURCE” to record the currently selected input

source.

4 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

5 Start recording on the recording component.

Recording

Caution

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being

recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and

adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your

DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output

from the player.

Notes

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture

itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

RECOUT

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS

71 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel

sources (surround decode mode)

Use this feature to play back sources with selected

decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-

channels.

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP and

then press

SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the

remote control to select the surround decode

mode.

You can select desired surround decoder modes depending

on the type of source you are playing and your personal

preference.

You can select the desired decoder and adjust the decoder

parameter settings by using GUI screen. See page 74 for details.

■ Decoder descriptions

Advanced sound configurations

Selecting decoders

SUR. DECODE

Surround Decoder

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

EXTD Surround

SUR. DECODE

Surround Decoder

PLIIx Movie

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround

Back” is set to “None” (see page 92).

EXTD Surround

SUR. DECODE

Surround Decoder

PLIIx Music

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround

Back” is set to “None” (see page 92).

Panorama Dimension Center Width

EXTD Surround

SUR. DECODE

Surround Decoder

PLIIx Game

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround

Back” is set to “None” (see page 92).

EXTD Surround

Center Width EXTD SurroundDimension

PLIIMusic

PLIIxMusic

SUR. DECODE

Surround Decode

Panorama

+10

SUR.DECODE

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not

available when “Surround Back” is set to “None” (see page 92).

Available decoder parameters (see page 80)

Program description

Remote control

button

Name of the

decoder

(Decoder Type)

Category and name

of the program

+10

SUR.DECODE

+10

SUR.DECODE

+10

SUR.DECODE

+10

SUR.DECODE

72 En

Advanced sound configurations

When you select the surround decode mode for the multi-channel digital sources, this unit automatically selects the corresponding

decoder for each source.

■ Selecting decoders used with sound

field programs

Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with

MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).

Use the “Decoder Type” parameter in “Stereo/Surround”

to set the desired decoder (see page 76).

See page 48 for details about MOVIE sound field program.

Available decoders (Decoder Type)

SUR. DECODE

Surround Decoder

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources.

EXTD Surround

+10

SUR.DECODE

SUR. DECODE

Surround Decoder

Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music sources.

Center Image EXTD Surround

SUR. DECODE

Surround Decoder

Neural THX

(U.S.A. and Canada models

only)

Neural-THX Surround processing for any sources. The Neural-THX Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD

Surround program of XM Satellite Radio.

EXTD Surround

+10

SUR.DECODE

+10

SUR.DECODE

Decoder Functions

PLIIx Movie

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro

Logic II) processing for movie sources.

The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available

when “Surround Back” is set to “None”

(see page 92).

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources

GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN

73 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) screen that helps you to control the amplifier function of

this unit. With the GUI screen, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit.

■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu)

Use this feature to select the sound field programs and customize the program parameter settings (see page 74).

■ Input Select (Input select menu)

Use this feature to select the input source and customize the parameters of each input source (see page 81).

■ Manual Setup (Manual setup menu)

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.

Volume (Volume menu)

See page 84 for details.

Sound (Sound menu)

See page 85 for details.

Video (Video menu)

See page 89 for details.

Basic (Basic menu)

See page 91 for details.

NET/USB (Network and USB menu)

See page 94 for details.

Option (Option menu)

See page 96 for details.

■ Auto Setup (Automatic setup menu)

Use this feature to run the automatic setup and specify which speaker parameters to be adjusted (see page 37).

■ System Memory (System memory menu)

Use this feature to store and recall various settings of this unit (see page 100).

■ Signal Info. (Signal information)

Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 98).

■ Language (GUI language menu)

Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the GUI screen of this unit (see page 99).

• You can also select the GUI language using “GUI Language” parameter in “Advanced setup” in the front panel display (see page 126).

• See page 44 for details about the operations in GUI screen.

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

Stereo/Surround

Input Select

Manual Setup

Auto Setup

System Memory

Sound

Video

Basic

NET/USB

Option

74 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

Use this feature to select the sound field programs (see

page 45), the surround decode mode or the “STRAIGHT”

mode (see page 50), and adjust the parameters of each

program.

■ Selecting sound field programs and

setting the parameters by using GUI

screen

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU.

2 Press

k / n / l / h repeatedly to select

“Stereo/Surround” and then press

3 Press

k / n repeatedly to select the desired

category of the programs and then press

4 Press

k / n repeatedly to select the desired

programs.

5 Press

h on the remote control and then

k / n to select the desired parameter.

You can select “Initialize” to set all the parameters of the

selected sound field program to the default values. See

page 80 for details.

6 Press

h and then press

l / h to adjust

the selected parameter.

7 Press

ENTER or

k / n to confirm the

setting of the selected parameter.

■ Basic configuration of sound field

programs

Each sound field program has some parameters defining

the characteristics of the program. To customize the

selected sound field program, adjust “DSP Level” and/or

“Dialogue Lift” first, and then try other parameters.

Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound

field programs (DSP Level)

Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect

sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field

in the listening room. Use the “DSP Level” parameter to

adjust the level of the effect sounds.

Adjust “DSP Level” as follows:

Increase the value of “DSP Level” when

• the effect sound of the selected sound field

program is too weak.

• you cannot recognize any difference between the

sound field programs.

Decrease the value of “DSP Level” when

• the sound is vague.

• you feel that the additional sound effect is

excessive.

Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB

Stereo/Surround

(Stereo/Surround menu)

The DSP effect

sound level is low.

The DSP effect sound

level is high.

75 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Adjusting the vertical dialogue position

(Dialogue Lift)

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the

dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is

at the center of the video monitor screen.

If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video

monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”.

Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the

highest position.

• “Dialogue Lift” is available only when “Presence” is set to

“Yes” (see page 92).

• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial

dialogue position.

Notes

The ideal

dialogue

position

Move up to the ideal dialogue position.

76 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

■ Sound field parameter descriptions

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

Sound field parameter Features

Decoder Type

Decoder type. Selects the decoder used with the SUR. DECODE or MOVIE programs. See pages 71

and 72 for details.

Init. Delay

Sur. Init. Delay

SB. Init. Delay

Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the apparent size

of the sound field by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the

listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound field seems to the listener.

When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding

room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs.

Control range: 1 to 99 ms (Init. Delay)

1 to 49 ms (Sur. Init. Delay and SB Init. Delay)

Room Size

Sur. Room Size

SB. Room Size

Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the sound

field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly

reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound

and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change

the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent

length of the room.

When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding

initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP

programs.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

Source sound

Early

reflections

Time

Delay

Sound source

Reflection face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

Time Time Time

Source sound

Early

reflections

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound source

77 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Liveness

Sur. Liveness

SB. Liveness

Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall

by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay

much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective

surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with

highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection

decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.

Control range: 0 to 10

Rev. Time

Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to

decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely

wide range. Set a longer reverberation time to get more sustaining reverberation sound, and set a

shorter time to get articulate sound.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s

Sound field parameter Features

Source sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time

Time Time

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Small value = 0 Large value = 10

Reverberation

ReverberationSource sound

Rev. Time

Rev. Time Rev. Time

Sound source

Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early reflections

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

78 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

Rev. Delay

Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the

beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A

later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 ms

Rev. Level

Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger

the reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Sound field parameter Features

(dB)

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

Rev. TimeRev. Delay

Time

60 dB

Source sound

Level

Rev. Level

Time

79 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Stereo program parameter descriptions

■ Compressed Music Enhancer mode parameter descriptions

Sound field parameter Features

Direct

(“2ch Stereo” only)

2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo

sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.

Choices: Auto, Off

• Select “Auto” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when

“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 51).

• Select “Off” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS”

and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.

• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front

left and right speakers.

• The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer in the

following cases:

– “Bass Out” is set to “Both” (see page 92).

– “Front” is set to “Small” (see page 92) and “Bass Out” is set to “SWFR” (see page 92).

Center Level

Surround L Level

Surround R Level

Sur. Back Level

Presence L Level

Presence R Level

(“7ch Stereo” only)

7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right

levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The available

parameters differ depending on the speaker settings.

Control range: 0 to 100%

The Compressed Music

Enhancer mode

Features

Level

(“Straight Enhancer” and

“7ch Enhancer” only)

Straight enhancer or 7-channel enhancer effect level. Select “High” or “Low” to adjust the effect for the

high-frequency.

Choices: High, Low

80 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

■ Decoder parameter descriptions

■ Initialize (Program parameters initialization)

Use this feature to initialize the parameter of the selected sound field program.

Choices: No, Yes

• Select “Yes” and then press 4ENTER to set the program parameters to the factory default settings.

• Select “No” (or press 4l) to cancel the program parameter initialization.

Use “DSP PARAM” of “INITIALIZE” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to initialize the parameters of all sound field programs (see

page 126).

Decoder parameter Features

Panorama

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as

well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: Off, On

Center Width

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely

towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center

channel output towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to

7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)

Initial setting: 3

Dimension

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front

or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)

Initial setting: STD (standard)

Center Image

(“Neo:6 Music” only)

DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center

channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.

Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to

1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker)

Initial setting: 0.3

EXTD Surround

(U.S.A. and Canada models

only)

Extended surround mode. Selects the extended surround mode used for the multi-channel sources when

the decoder is selected. See page 88 for details.

Choices: AUTO, PLIIx Movie, PLIIx Music, EX/ES, EX, Neural-THX, OFF

You can select “Neural-THX” in “EXTD Surround”. When you select “Neural-THX” in “EXTD

Surround”, this unit plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Neural-THX

Surround decoder.

SB. Room Size

Dialogue Lift

Initialize No

Yes

81 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the

input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the

signal input at each input source.

• Some parameters described above may not be available for all

input sources and some parameters are only available for

specific input sources.

• When iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such

as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal

of this unit, “DOCK” appears in the “Input Select” menu

instead of “V-AUX”. In such cases, the parameters marked with

asterisk (*) in the above table do not appear in the input source

parameter menu.

• When you select “NET/USB” as the input source, selected sub

input source (PC/MCX, NET RADIO or USB) appears in the

Input Select menu. You can set “Volume Trim” for each sub

input source separately.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU.

The top display appears.

2 Press 4k / n to select “Input Select” and

then press

3 Select the desired input source (CD, DVD,

etc.) and then press

h or

ENTER to

access and adjust.

■ Antenna Level (Antenna level)

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Use this feature to check the current reception level of the

XM Satellite Radio signals (see page 56). For the best

reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna of

connected Home Dock so that a value of 60% or more is

displayed here.

Display status: None, 0 to 100%

• “None” is displayed if the Home Dock is not connected to this unit.

In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 56).

• The “Antenna Level” parameter cannot be adjusted by using the

remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the

antenna of Home Dock connected to the XM jack of this unit

for a better percentage of the reception level.

Input Select

Input source Parameter

(U.S.A. and Canada models

only)

Antenna Level

Volume Trim

Rename

TUNER Volume Trim

Rename

MULTI CH Volume Trim

Rename

Multi CH Assign

BGV

PHONO

CD-R

MD/TAPE

BD/HD DVD

DVD

DTV/CBL

DVR

VCR

I/O Assignment

Audio Select

Decoder Mode

Volume Trim

Rename

V-AUX or DOCK I/O Assignment*

Audio Select*

Decoder Mode*

Volume Trim

Rename

PC/MCX, NET RADIO or

USB

Volume Trim

Notes

Stereo/Surround

Input Select

Manual Setup

Auto Setup

System Memory

Sound

Video

Basic

NET/USB

Option

Stereo/Surround

Input Select

Manual Setup

Auto Setup

MD/TAPE

BD/HD DVD

DVD

DTV/CBL

DVR

Antenna Level

Volume Trim

Rename

Antenna Level

96%

82 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

■ I/O Assignment

(Input/output assignment)

Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according

to the component to be used if the initial settings of this

unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the

following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and

effectively connect more components.

Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select

the corresponding component by using the

INPUT

selector (or the input selector buttons (1)).

Example 1: Assigning the CD DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL jack to the DVD input.

1 Select “Input Select” in the GUI screen and

then select “DVD”.

2 Select “I/O Assignment” and then “Coaxial

Input”.

3 Select “

CD”.

Example 2: Clearing a jack assignment.

1 Select “Input Select” and then select the

desired input source (“DVD”, etc.).

2 Select “I/O Assignment” and then select the

desired jack assignment (“Coaxial Input”,

“Optical Input”, “Optical Output”,

“Component Video”, or “HDMI”).

3 Select “None” and then press

ENTER to

clear the assignment.

• “None” appears in the GUI when any input source is not

assigned to the input/output jack.

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to signals input at the

COAXIAL jack.

■ Audio Select (Audio input jack select)

Use this feature to select the type of the input jack you

want to use.

• You can also select the audio input jack by pressing

AUDIO

SELECT on the front panel (or

AUDIO SEL on the remote

control). See page 42 for details.

• You can set the default audio input jack select of this unit by

using “Audio Select” in “Option” (see page 98).

This feature is not available when no digital input jack

(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition,

“HDMI” is not available as an Audio input jack select setting

when the HDMI input jacks are not used. Use “I/O Assignment”

in “Input Select” to reassign the respective input jack.

■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)

Use this feature to switch the decoder mode. You can

designate the reassigned digital input jacks (see page 82)

for DTS signals.

■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at

each input source. This is useful if you want to balance the

level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in

volume when switching between input sources.

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

This parameter also affects the signals output at ZONE OUT

jacks.

You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using

this setting.

Notes

I/O Assignment

Audio Select

Decoder Mode

Optical Output

Component Video

HDMI

Choice Functions

Auto

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) HDMI

(2) Digital signals

(3) Analog signals

HDMI

Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI

signals are not input, no sound is output.

Coax/Opt

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack.

(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack.

When no signals are input, no sound is output.

Analog

Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals

are input, no sound is output.

Note

Choice Functions

Auto

Automatically detects digital audio signal input

types and selects the appropriate decoder.

DTS

Activates the DTS decoder when digital audio

signals are input.

Note

83 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Rename (Rename)

Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the

GUI screen or the front panel display menu. (DVD is used

as the source component in the following example.)

1 Press

l / h to place the _ (underscore)

under the space or character you want to

edit.

2 Press

ENTER repeatedly to select a

character type (CAPITAL/SMALL/FIGURE/

MARK).

3 Press

k / n to select the character you

want to use and

l / h to move to the next

one.

• You can use up to 9 characters for each input.

• Press 4n to change the character in the following

order, or press 4k to go in the reverse order:

CAPITAL A to Z, space

SMALL a to z, space

FIGURE 0 to 9, space

MARK !, #, %, &, etc.

• Press

ENTER to switch between character

types.

• Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input.

Even if you select “Français”, “Deutsch”, “Español” or

“Русский” in “Language” (see page 99), you cannot use

accent symbols or cyrillic alphabets for the name of each

input.

4 Press 4l / h repeatedly to select “OK” and

press 4ENTER when complete.

You can also change the name of the input source that appears in

the display window (B) on the remote control. Refer to

“Changing source names in the display window” on page 110.

You can only change the name of the current input source (except

for multi channel input sources) using this setting.

■ Multi CH Assign

(Multi channel assignment)

Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input

into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a

source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks.

Input Channels (Input channels)

Use this setting to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder (see page 29).

If “Zone2 Amplifier” (page 97) is set to “INT:[SP1]”,

“INT:[SP2]” or “INT:Both”, no sound is output from the surround

back speakers even if you select “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch”

and set the output setting of the external component to 6 channels.

Front Input

(Front left and right channels input jacks)

If you selected “8ch” in “Input Channels”, you can select

analog jacks at which front left and right channel signals

from an external decoder will be input.

Choices: CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, BD/HD DVD, DVD,

DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR, V-AUX

■ BGV (Back ground video)

Use this feature to select the video source played in the

background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks.

Note

Decoder Mode

Volume Trim

Rename

CAPITAL

DVD

OK RESET

Choice Description

6ch

Select “6ch” the connected component outputs

discrete 6-channel audio signals.

8ch

Select “8ch” the connected component outputs

discrete 8-channel audio signals. Also set “Front

Input” (see below) to the analog audio jacks at

which the front left and right channel signals

output from the connected component are input.

Note

Choice Functions

Last

Automatically selects the last selected video

source as the background video source.

BD/HD DVD,

DTV/CBL,

DVD, DVR,

VCR, V-AUX

Selects the corresponding input source as the

background video source.

Off

Does not play the video source in the

background.

84 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume

settings.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU on the remote

control.

2 Press

k / n on the remote control to select

“Manual Setup” and then press

3 Press

k / n / l / h on the remote control to

select “Volume” and then press

4 Select the desired parameters and then press

h to access and adjust.

Adaptive DRC (Adaptive dynamic range control)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in

conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful

when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When

“Adaptive DRC” is set to “Auto”, this unit controls the

dynamic range as follows:

– If the VOLUME setting is low:

the dynamic range is narrow

– If the VOLUME setting is high:

the dynamic range is wide

• You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal

sources by using “Dynamic Range” in “Sound” (see page 85).

• This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.

The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function

when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode (see page 51).

Adaptive DSP Lvl (Adaptive DSP effect level)

Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP

effect level (see page 74) automatically in conjunction

with the volume level.

Even if you set “Adaptive DSP Lvl” to “Auto”, this unit does not

change but fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP Level” (see

page 74).

Max Volume (Maximum volume)

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main

zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud

sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is

–80.0 dB to +16.5 dB. However, when “Max Volume” is set

to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes –80.0 dB to –5.0 dB.

Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

Initial Volume (Initial volume)

Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone

when the power of this unit is turned on.

Choices: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level

is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “Max

Volume” setting.

• The “Max Volume” setting takes priority over the initial volume

setting. For example, if “Initial Volume” is set to –20.0 dB and

“Max Volume” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is

automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of

this unit next time.

Muting Type (Muting type)

Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function

reduces the output volume (see page 43).

Manual Setup (Volume)

Choice Functions

Auto

Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.

Off

Does not adjust the dynamic range

automatically.

Volume

Sound

Video

Adaptive DRC

Adaptive DSP Lvl

Max Volume

Initial Volume

Muting Type

Input level

Output level

Input level

AUTO

OFF

AUTO

OFF

VOLUME: low VOLUME: high

Note

Choice Functions

Auto

Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction with

the volume level.

Off

Does not adjust the DSP effect level

automatically.

Note

Notes

Choice Functions

Full

Mutes all the audio output.

–20dB

Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.

85 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU on the remote

control.

2 Press

k / n on the remote control to select

“Manual Setup” and then press

3 Press

k / n / l / h on the remote control to

select “Sound” and then press

4 Select the desired parameters and then press

h to access and adjust.

■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of

your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries

low-frequency special effects which are only added to

certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes bitstream signals.

Control range: –20.0 to 0.0 dB

Control step: 1.0 dB

Speakers (Speaker low-frequency effect level)

Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.

Headphones

(Headphone low-frequency effect level)

Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of “Bass Out” (see page 92), some

signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack.

■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)

Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range

compression to be applied to your speakers or

headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is

decoding bitstream signals.

Speakers (Speaker dynamic range)

Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers.

Headphones (Headphone dynamic range)

Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the

headphones.

■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer of each

speaker.

1 Press

k / n / l / h to select Test Tone or

the speaker you want to adjust.

Manual Setup (Sound)

Note

Choice Functions

MAX

Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range.

STD

Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. When

this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals, the

dynamic range control is always active

regardless of the instruction of the input source

signals.

MIN/AUTO

• MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow

when this unit is decoding bitstream signals

(except Dolby TrueHD).

• AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range according

to the instruction of the input source signals

when this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD

signals.

Choice Adjusted speaker

Front L

Front left speaker

Front R

Front right speaker

Center

Center speaker

Surround L

Surround left speaker

Surround R

Surround right speaker

Surround Back L

Surround back left speaker

Surround Back R

Surround back right speaker

Presence L

Presence left speaker

Presence R

Presence right speaker

Subwoofer

LFE Level

Dynamic Range

Parametric EQ

Tone Control

Lipsync

Test Tone

Front L

Front R

Center

86 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

Test Tone

Use this feature to select whether to turn on or off the

test tone output while you are adjusting the tonal

quality of each speaker.

2 Press

h to access the settings window.

3 Press

k / n / l / h to select “PARAM” and

then press

ENTER to select a parameter

from “Band” (band), “Freq.” (frequency) or

“Q” (Q factor).

You can adjust “Gain” (gain) with any parameter.

4 Press

n to select “EDIT” and press

ENTER to access the edit window.

For more information on the parametric equalizer and

each parameter, see page 142.

The parameter selected in “PARAM” is highlighted.

• Press

l / h to adjust the parameter.

• Press

k / n to adjust the “Gain”.

• Press

ENTER to exit the edit window.

• When you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu

as a graphic equalizer.

• The “Band #1” and “Band #2” can adjust the frequencies

below of 198.4 Hz.

• When you select “Subwoofer” in step 1 and “Band” in

step 3, you can adjust “Band #1” and “Band #2” only.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied

with the results.

If you want to reset all “Parametric EQ” parameter settings

for the selected speaker, select “RESET” and press

ENTER.

6 Select “EXIT” and press

ENTER to exit the

settings window.

■ Tone Control (Tone control)

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble

output to your speakers or headphones.

Tone Control is not effective when:

– PURE DIRECT (see page 51) is selected.

– MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

Control (Tone control)

“Speaker” and “Headphone” adjustments are stored

independently. The adjustments for “Speaker” affects the front

left/right, center, presence left/right speaker channels and

Subwoofer channel.

Bass (Bass control)

Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your

speakers or headphones.

Choices: 125Hz, 350Hz, 500Hz

Control range: – 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

Choice Functions

Outputs the test tone.

Off

Does not output the test tone.

Test Tone

Front L

Front R

Center

PARAM RESET

EDIT EXIT

Band / Gain

Test Tone

Front L

Front R

Center

Band #1

Gain 0.0dB

Freq. 62.5Hz

Q 1.000

Note

Choice Functions

Speaker

adjust the bass/treble balance of your speakers.

Headphone

adjust the bass/treble balance of your

headphones.

-6

Control

Bass

Treble

Auto Bypass

Speaker

Freq : 350Hz

Gain : 0.0dB

87 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Treble (Treble control)

Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your

speakers or headphones.

Choices: 2.5kHz, 3.5kHz, 8.0kHz

Control range: – 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

Auto Bypass (Auto bypass)

Use this feature to select whether the audio output

bypasses the tone control circuitry when “Treble” and

“Bass” are set to 0 dB (see page 51).

■ Lipsync

(Audio and video synchronization)

Use this feature to adjust the audio and video

synchronization.

HDMI Auto (HDMI automatic lip sync mode)

If the connected video monitor is connected to the HDMI

OUT jack of this unit and compatible with the automatic

audio and video synchronization function (automatic lip

sync), this unit adjusts the audio and video

synchronization automatically. Use this feature to activate

or deactivate the automatic lip sync.

Auto (Automatic audio delay adjustment)

Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and

video synchronization when you set “HDMI Auto” to

“ON”.

Control range: 0 to 240 ms

Control step: 1 ms

“offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio

delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio

delay that you set in “Auto”. This unit stores the value of “offset”

and applies the value to other automatic lip sync compatible video

monitors.

Manual (Manual audio delay adjustment)

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output

manually to synchronize audio with video images when

you set “HDMI Auto” to “Off”.

Control range: 0 to 240 ms

Control step: 1 ms

Choice Functions

Auto

Automatically bypasses the tone control

circuitry to provide the purest signal possible

when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB.

Off

Does not bypass the tone control circuitry.

Choice Descriptions

Off

Select this setting if the connected video

monitor is compatible with the automatic lip

sync. Use “Auto” to make fine adjustments of

the audio and video synchronization.

Select this setting if the video monitor is not

compatible with the automatic lip sync or you

do not want to use the automatic lip sync. Use

“Manual” to adjustment the audio and video

synchronization.

-6

Control

Bass

Treble

Auto Bypass

Speaker

Freq : 3.5kHz

Gain : 0.0dB

88 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

■ EXTD Surround (Extended surround)

Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for

multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx,

Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders by using the

connected surround back speakers.

Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when

this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input sources

correctly.

• The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the

speakers and the input sources.

• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases:

– when “Surround” (see page 92) or “Surround Back” (see

page 92) is set to “None”.

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is being played.

– when the source being played does not contain surround left

and right channel signals.

– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– when this unit is in the stereo playback, Compressed Music

Enhancer (see page 79) or Pure Direct (see page 51) mode.

– when “BI-AMP” is set to “On” (see page 126).

• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to “Auto”.

• (U.S.A. and Canada models only) “EXTD Surround” does not

function when this unit is in the surround decode mode (see

page 72). You can select the desired extended surround mode

for each decoder by setting “EXTD” (see page 80).

■ Channel Mute (Channel mute)

Use this feature to mute specific speaker channels.

Mode (Mode)

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the “Channel

Mute” setting for each speaker.

Each speaker settings

Select whether this unit mutes each speaker channel when

you set “Mode” to “Enable”.

Choice Functions

Auto

Activates the optimum decoder to play back

signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit

recognizes a signal flag being input.

PLIIx Movie

Plays back multi-channel sources in 7.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.

PLIIx Music

Plays back multi-channel sources in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder.

EX/ES

Plays back multi-channel sources in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES

decoder.

Plays back multi-channel sources in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

Off

Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1

channels.

Notes

Choice Functions

Disable

Deactivates the “Channel Mute” function.

Enable

Activates the “Channel Mute” function.

Channel Mute Speaker channel

Front L

Front left

Front R

Front right

Center

Surround L

Surround left

Surround R

Surround right

Surround Back L

Surround back left

Surround Back R

Surround back right

Presence L

Presence left

Presence R

Presence right

Subwoofer

Choice Functions

Mute On

Mutes the selected speaker channel.

Mute Off

Does not mute the selected speaker channel.

89 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this menu to adjust the video parameters.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU on the remote

control.

2 Press

k / n / l / h on the remote control to

select “Manual Setup” and then press

3 Press

k / n / l / h on the remote control to

select “Video” and then press

4 Select the desired parameters and then press

h to access and adjust.

Use the “Video” in “Initialize” to set the parameters in “Manual

Setup (Video)” (except “Short Message” and “On Screen”) to the

factory presets (see page 126).

■ Conversion (Video conversion)

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the video scaling

as well as the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video

signals input at the composite VIDEO, S VIDEO, and

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line

video signals interchangeably.

• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i

(PAL) of resolution are converted into the S-video or composite

video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR

OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the

same type of video connections between each component.

• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are

converted into component video signals, the picture quality may

suffer depending on your VCR.

• Even when “Conversion” is set to “On”, HDMI digital signals

are not converted to analog video signals.

• If “Conversion” is set to “Off”, the “Component I/P”, “HDMI

Resolution”, “HDMI Aspect”, and “Short Message” features

are deactivated.

• Set “Conversion” to “On” to display the short message.

• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video

jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such

cases, set “Conversion” to “Off”.

• When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a

video game console) are input, this unit does not display short

messages on the video monitor even if “Conversion” is set to

“On”.

• When the analog component video signals with 480p of

resolution are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and the

video monitor is connected to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT or

S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, the GUI screen is

not displayed on the video monitor.

• This unit does not up-scale the analog component video signals

with 720p or 1080i of resolution.

■ Component I/P (Component interlace/

progressive conversion)

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog

interlace/progressive conversion of the analog video

signals input at the composite video, S-video and

component video jacks so that the analog video signals

deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p

are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks.

• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the GUI

screen if “Conversion” is set to “Off”.

• If your video monitor does not support analog video signals

with 480p/576p of resolution, the GUI screen may not be

displayed on your video monitor when “Component I/P” is set

to “On”. In such a case, set “VIDEO” of “INITIALIZE” in

“ADVANCED SETUP” parameter to “Off” (see page 126).

Manual Setup (Video)

Note

Choice Functions

Converts composite, S-video, and component

video signals interchangeably and up-converts

composite, S-video, and component video

signals to HDMI video signals.

Off

Does not convert any signals.

Notes

Choice Functions

Activates the analog interlace/progressive up-

conversion of the analog video signals.

Off

Deactivates the analog interlace/progressive up-

conversion of the analog video signals.

Notes

90 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

■ HDMI Resolution

(HDMI video signal resolution)

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI up-

scaling of the analog video signals input at the composite

video, S-video and component video jacks so that the up-

scaled analog video signals are output at the HDMI OUT

jack.

This unit up-scales the analog video signals as follows:

• 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) → 480p/576p, 1080i,

720p, or 1080p

• 480p/576p → 1080i, 720p, or 1080p

• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the GUI

menu if “Conversion” is set to “Off” (see page 89).

• This unit does not up-scale the digital video signals input at the

HDMI input jacks.

■ HDMI Aspect (HDMI aspect ratio)

Use this feature to select the adjustment of aspect ratio for

analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack.

• When “HDMI Resolution” is set to “Through”, you cannot

make any adjustments to “HDMI Aspect”.

• If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this

unit automatically ignores the setting of “HDMI Aspect”.

• When “HDMI Aspect” is set to “Smart Zoom”, the video

images of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched.

• When the video signals are input at HDMI IN jacks or the

signals are input with 720p, 1080i or 1080p of resolution, the

setting of “HDMI Aspect” does not affect the video signals

output at the HDMI OUT jack.

■ Short Message (Short message display)

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message

display function.

The short message display does not appear in the following cases:

– when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p

resolutions are input

– when HDMI video signals are input

■ On Screen (On-screen display time)

Use this feature to set the time for which the XM Satellite

Radio information, iPod or NET/USB menu is displayed

on the video monitor after you perform a certain

operation.

■ Position (GUI screen position)

Use this feature to adjust the vertical and horizontal

position of the GUI screen.

Control range: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)

Choice Functions

Through

Does not up-scale any analog video signals.

480p (or

576p), 1080i,

720p, 1080p

Up-scales analog video signals to 480p or 576p,

1080i, 720p, or 1080p of resolution.

Notes

Choice Functions

Through

Does not make any adjustments to the aspect

ratio for the HDMI video signal sources.

16:9 Normal

Displays video images with the aspect ratio of

4:3 on your video monitor with the aspect ratio

of 16:9. Black stripes appear on the right and

left sides as a result.

Smart Zoom

Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 to

your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9.

Notes

Choice Functions

Activates the short message display function.

The contents of the front panel display appear at

the bottom of the screen each time you operate

this unit.

Off

Deactivates the short message display function.

Note

Choice Functions

Always

Displays the OSD unceasingly during an

operation.

10sec

Turns off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform

a certain operation.

30sec

Turns off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform

a certain operation.

Button Moving direction of the GUI display

4 k

4 n

Down

4 h

Right

4 l

Left

:0 //

Short Message

On Screen

Position

Wall Paper

91 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Wall Paper (Wall paper)

Use this feature to display the wall paper or gray

background in your video monitor when there is no video

signal being input.

When “Conversion” is set to “Off”, no background is displayed

even if “Wall Paper” is set to “Yes”.

Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker setting.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU on the remote

control.

2 Press

k / n to select “Manual Setup” and

then press

3 Press

k / n / l / h to select “Basic” and

then press

4 Select the desired parameters and then press

h to access and adjust.

• Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set

automatically when you run “Auto Setup”. You can use the

basic menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend

running “Auto Setup” first.

• You can reset these parameters by performing the “Auto Setup”

procedure (see page 37).

• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the

crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or

slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

■ Test Tone (Test tone)

Turns the test tone output on or off for “Speaker Set”,

“Speaker Distance”, and “Speaker Level” settings.

If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s

length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening

position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,

calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.

• Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this

case, make sure no children are present in the listening room.

• This function is automatically turned off if you exit “Basic”.

■ Speaker Set (Speaker settings)

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.

If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

Choice Functions

None

Does not display any background in your video

monitor.

Yes

Display a background image (the photograph of

a piano) in your monitor when there is no video

signal being input.

Gray

Display a gray background in your monitor

when there is no video signal being input.

Note

Manual Setup (Basic)

Choice Functions

Off

This unit does not output the test tone for the

“Speaker Set”, “Speaker Level”, and “Speaker

Distance” settings.

This unit outputs the test tone for the “Speaker

Set”, “Speaker Level”, and “Speaker Distance”

settings.

Notes

92 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

Front (Front speakers)

• When “Bass Out” is set to “Front”, the LFE signals found in

bitstream sources, the low-frequency signals of the front left

and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other

speakers set to “Small” are all directed to the front left and right

speakers regardless of the “Front” setting.

• When “Bass Out” is set to “Front”, you can select only “Large”

in “Front”. If the value of “Front” is set to other than “Large” in

advance, this unit change the value to “Large” automatically.

Center (Center speaker)

Surround (Surround left/right speakers)

See page 15 for the connection information of the surround

speakers.

Surround Back

(Surround back left/right speakers)

See page 15 for the connection information of the surround

speakers.

Presence (Presence speakers)

Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers

connected to this unit.

• If you set “Presence” to “No”, you cannot activate the CINEMA

DSP 3D mode (see page 50).

• “Dialogue Lift” is available only when “Presence” is set to

“Yes” (see page 75).

Bass Out (Bass out)

Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE

(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.

LFE signals output

Measure for the speaker size

The woofer section of a speaker is

– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large

– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small

Choice Descriptions

Large

Select this setting when the front speakers are

large.

Small

Select this setting when the front speakers are

small.

Notes

Choice Descriptions

Large

Select this setting when the center speaker is

large.

Small

Select this setting when the center speaker is

small.

None

Select this setting when you do not use the

center speaker. The center channel signals are

directed to the front left and right speakers.

Choice Descriptions

Large

Select this setting when the surround speakers

are large.

Small

Select this setting when the surround speakers

are small.

None

Select this setting when you do not use the

surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode (see page 50), and

“Surround Back” is automatically set to “None”.

Choice Descriptions

Large x1

Select this setting when the single surround back

speaker is large.

Large x2

Select this setting when the surround back left

and right speakers are Large.

Small x1

Select this setting when the single surround back

speaker is small.

Small x2

Select this setting when the surround back left

and right speakers are small.

None

Select this setting when you do not use the

surround back speakers. The surround back

channel signals are directed to the surround left

and right speakers.

Choice Descriptions

Yes

Select “Yes” when you use the presence

speakers.

None

Select “None” when you do not use the presence

speakers.

Notes

Choice

Subwoofer and speakers

Subwoofer

Front

speakers

Other

speakers

Both

Output Output No output

SWFR

Output No output No output

Front

No output Output No output

93 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Low-frequency signals output

*1 Output(s) the low-frequency signals of the front channels and

other speakers set to “Small” or “None”.

*2 Always output the low-frequency signals of the front

channels.

*3 Output the low-frequency signals if the speakers are set to

“Large”.

*4 Outputs the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to

“Small” or “None”.

Bass Cross Over (Bass cross over)

Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the

speakers set to “Small” or to “None” in “Speaker Set” (see

pages 91 and 92). All frequencies below the selected

frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers

set to “Large” in “Speaker Set” (see pages 91 and 92).

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover

frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and

set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

SWFR Phase (Subwoofer phase)

Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if

bass sounds are lacking or unclear.

PR/SB Priority

(Presence/surround back speaker priority)

Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the

surround back speakers when playing back 2-channel

audio sources using the sound field programs.

When the CINEMA DSP 3D mode is active (see page 50), this

unit always prioritize the presence speakers.

■ Speaker Distance (Speaker distance)

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each

speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in most

home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be

applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will

arrive at the listening position at the same time.

Speaker distances

Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Initial setting:

Front L/Front R/Subwoofer/Presence L/Presence R/

Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)

Surround L/Surround R/Surround Back L/

Surround Back R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)

Control step: 0.1 m (0.5 ft)

If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover

frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and

set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting

of the speakers.

• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to

the SURROUND BACK SINGLE jack, and adjust the distance

in “Surround Back L”.

Choice

Subwoofer and speakers

Subwoofer

Front

speakers

Other

speakers

Both

*1 *2 *3

SWFR

*4 *3 *3

Front

No output *1 *3

Choice Functions

Normal

(normal)

Does not change the phase of your subwoofer.

Reverse

(reverse)

Sets the phase of your subwoofer to reverse.

Choice Functions

Presence

Uses the presence speakers.

Surround

Back

Uses the surround back speakers.

Note

Speaker Distance Adjusted speaker

Front L

Front left speaker

Front R

Front right speaker

Center

Center speaker

Surround L

Surround left speaker

Surround R

Surround right speaker

Surround Back L

Surround back left speaker

Surround Back R

Surround back right speaker

Presence L

Presence left speaker

Presence R

Presence right speaker

Subwoofer

Notes

Test Tone

Speaker Set

Speaker Distance

Speaker Level

Subwoofer

Unit

Front L

Front R

Center

94 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

Unit (Unit)

Selects the unit for displaying the values of “Speaker

Distance” parameter.

Initial setting:Feet (U.S.A. and Canada models)

Meter (Other models)

■ Speaker Level (Speaker level)

Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left or surround left speakers and each

speaker selected in “Speaker Set” (see page 91).

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Initial setting:

Front L/Front R/Presence L/Presence R/Subwoofer:

0.0 dB

CENTER/Surround L/Surround R/Surround Back L/

Surround Back R: –1.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover

frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and

set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting

of the speakers.

• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to

the SURROUND BACK SINGLE jack, and adjust the balance

in “Surround Back L”.

Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system

parameters.

■ Network (Network settings)

Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP

address, etc.) or to change them manually.

DHCP (DHCP setting)

Use this feature to select whether this unit can obtain the

network parameters (IP address, subnet mask, default

gateway, primary DNS server and secondary DNS server)

from the DHCP server of the connected network.

IP Address (IP address)

Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to

this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for

other devices in the target network.

Subnet Mask (Subnet mask)

Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value

assigned to this unit.

For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as

“255.255.255.0”.

Default Gateway (Default gateway)

Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default

gateway.

DNS Server (P) (Primary DNS server)

DNS Server (S) (Secondary DNS server)

Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary

and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.

If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in

“DNS Server (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter

one of them in “DNS Server (P)” and another in

“DNS Server (S)”.

Setup (Setup)

Select “Setup” to confirm the settings of the “Network”

parameters.

Choice Functions

Meter (m)

Adjusts speaker distances in meters.

Feet (ft)

Adjusts speaker distances in feet.

Speaker Level Adjusted speaker

Front L

Front left speaker

Front R

Front right speaker

Center

Center speaker

Surround L

Surround left speaker

Surround R

Surround right speaker

Surround Back L

Surround back left speaker

Surround Back R

Surround back right speaker

Presence L

Presence left speaker

Presence R

Presence right speaker

Subwoofer

Notes

Manual Setup (NET/USB)

Choice Descriptions

Select this setting when this unit can obtain the

network parameters from the DHCP server of

the connected network.

Off

Select this setting when you set the network

parameters manually.

Note

95 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Procedure of the network configuration

1 From the top GUI screen, press

k / n on

the remote control repeatedly and then 4h

to select “Network”.

2 Press

k / n repeatedly and then 4h to

select “DHCP”.

3 Press 4k / n to select “On” or “Off” and

then 4ENTER to confirm.

• If you select “On”, you do not have to set other network

parameters. Refer to step 5 and finish the configuration.

• If you select “Off”, you need to set other network

parameters. Refer to steps 4 through 6 to set the

parameters.

When “DHCP” is set to “On”, you cannot select and adjust

any other network settings. To specify the other parameters,

you need to first set “DHCP” to “Off”.

Press

n to select the desired parameter

and then 4h.

5 Press 4l / h repeatedly to select the digit

to change and then press 4k / n repeatedly

to change the number.

6 Press 4ENTER to confirm the setting of the

parameter.

7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 to configure each

network parameter.

8 Press 4n repeatedly to select “Setup” and

then 4ENTER to finish configuration.

In case you have changed your network configuration, you may

need to reconfigure the network settings again.

You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory

settings by using “NETWORK” of “INITIALIZE” in the

advanced setup menu (see page 126).

■ Play Style (Playback styles)

Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to

your preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order

or repeat one specific song or a sequence of songs.

Repeat (Repeat)

Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

If “Repeat” is set to “Single”, the setting will be reset to “Off”

when this unit is turned off.

Shuffle (Shuffle)

Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a

random order.

■ Information (Network information)

Use this feature to display the network system

information.

The above display is an example.

MAC Address

(MAC (Media Access Control) address)

This information displays the MAC address that is

assigned to this unit.

Status (Network status)

This information displays the current link status of the

network.

Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, Full Duplex,

Half Duplex, No Link

“No Link” appears when network connection is not made.

System (System ID)

This information displays the system ID that is assigned to

this unit.

Note

Choice Functions

Off

Deactivates the repeat function.

Single

Repeats one song. “ ” appears in the top

right corner of the playback status screen.

All

Repeats a sequence of songs. “ ” appears in

the top right corner of the playback status

screen.

Note

Choice Functions

Off

Deactivates the shuffle function.

Play songs or albums in a random order. “ ”

appears in the top right corner of the playback

status screen.

Note

Network

Play Style

Information

MAC Address

00:00:00:00:00:00

Status

100 BASE-TX

Full Duplex

System

ABCDE123

96 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

This menu adjusts the optional system settings.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU on the remote

control.

2 Press

k / n to select “Manual Setup” and

then press

3 Press

k / n / l / h to select “Option” and

then press

4 Select the desired parameters and then press

h to access and adjust.

■ Front Panel Disp.

(Front panel display setting)

Dimmer (Dimmer)

Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel

display.

Control range: – 4 to 0

Scroll (Front panel display message scroll)

Use this feature to set whether to display the information

(such as song title or channel name) in the front panel

display in a continuous manner or by the first 14

alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once

when “XM”, “DOCK” or “NET/USB” is selected as the

input source.

■ iPod (iPod settings)

Standby Charge

(iPod charge on the standby mode)

Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the

battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the

standby mode (see page 62).

■ Zone OSD (On-screen display)

Use this feature to display the operational status of Zone 2

as well as Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video monitor connected

to the ZONE VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of this unit.

The Zone 2 and Zone 3 information to be displayed is

listed as follows:

• The input source

• The volume level

• The audio mute status

• The tonal quality status

• The XM Satellite Radio information when XM is

selected as the input source of Zone 2 and/or Zone 3

Manual Setup (Option)

Video

Basic

Option

Front Panel Disp.

iPod

Zone OSD

Zone2 Set

Zone3 Set

Dimmer

Scroll

Choice Functions

Continue

Continuous mode.

Select this to display the operation status in the

front panel display in a continuous manner.

Once

Scroll-once mode.

Select this to display the operation status in the

front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric

characters after scrolling all characters once.

Choice Functions

Auto

Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when

this unit is turned on and in the standby mode.

Off

Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only

when this unit is turned on.

Choice Functions

Off

Does not display any operational status of Zone

2 and Zone 3.

Zone2

Displays the operational status of Zone 2 only.

Zone2&Zone3

Displays the operational status of Zone 2 and

Zone 3.

97 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

• You can connect up to two video monitors to the ZONE VIDEO

jacks of this unit as the Zone 2 video monitors. If you connect

two video monitors to the ZONE VIDEO jacks, these video

monitors displays the same video images of the input source of

Zone 2.

• When you set “Zone OSD” to “Zone2&Zone3”, the operational

status of Zone 3 appears on the Zone 2 video monitor(s) even if

Zone 2 is turned off.

■ Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set

(Zone 2/Zone 3 setting)

Zone2 Amplifier/Zone3 Amplifier

(Zone 2/Zone 3 amplifier)

Use to select how the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers are

amplified.

• When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see

page 126), you can only set “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3

Amplifier” to “EXT”.

• When you set “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” to

“INT:[SP1]” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound

is output from the surround back speakers.

• When you set “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” to

“INT:[SP2]” in “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” and the corresponding

zone is turned on, no sound is output from the surround

speakers.

• When you set “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” to

“INT:Both”, you can only set “AMP” to “EXT” in the other

zone setting.

• When you set “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” to

“INT:Both” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound

is output from both the surround and surround back speakers.

Zone2 Volume/Zone3 Volume

(Zone 2/Zone 3 volume)

Use this feature to select whether this unit controls the

volume level of the audio signals output at the ZONE

OUT (ZONE2 or ZONE3) jacks when you set “Zone2

Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” to “EXT”.

Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol.

(Zone 2/Zone 3 Maximum volume)

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the

Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes priority

over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.” setting. For

example, “Zone2 Initial Vol.” is set to –20.0 dB and then “Zone2

Max Vol.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set

to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time.

Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol.

(Zone 2/Zone 3 Initial volume)

Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone

3 when the power of this unit is turned on.

Choices: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes priority

over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.” setting.

Notes

Choice Descriptions

EXT

Select this setting when the speakers in Zone 2

or Zone 3 are connected to the external amplifier

and the external amplifier is connected to the

ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks of this

unit. “Using external amplifiers” on page 117

for details.

INT:[SP1]

Select this setting when the speakers in Zone 2

or Zone 3 is connected to the SP1 speaker

terminals of this unit directly. See “Using the

internal amplifiers of this unit” on page 118 for

details.

INT:[SP2]

Select this setting when the speakers in Zone 2

or Zone 3 is connected to the SP2 speaker

terminals of this unit directly. See “Using the

internal amplifiers of this unit” on page 118 for

details.

INT:Both

Select this setting when the speakers in Zone 2

or Zone 3 are connected to both the SP1 and SP2

speaker terminals (for example, the speakers are

connected via the bi-amplifier connection, or

there are four speakers in a room) or if you want

to play back the same source in Zone 2 and Zone

3 simultaneously. See “Using the internal

amplifiers of this unit” on page 118 for details.

Notes

Choice Descriptions

Fixed

Select this setting when you want to control the

volume level of the selected zone on the external

amplifier. This unit fixes the ZONE OUT

(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level to a standard

line level.

Variable

Select this setting when you want to control the

volume level of the selected zone on this unit.

You can adjust the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or

ZONE 3) volume level simultaneously with

VOLUME +/– on the remote control.

Note

98 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

■ Audio Select

(Default audio input jack select)

Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack

select setting (see page 81) for the input sources connected

to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power

of this unit.

■ Decoder Mode (Default decoder mode)

Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode

(see page 82) for the input sources when you turn on the

power of this unit.

■ EXTD Surround

(Default Extended surround setting)

Use this feature to designate the extended decoder mode

(see page 88) for the input sources connected to the

DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of

this unit.

■ Memory Guard (Memory guard)

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound

field program parameter values and other system settings.

When you select the protected parameter, “ ” appears at the

bottom left of the GUI screen. You can adjust the parameters

when you select the parameter and “ ” does not appear at the

bottom left of the GUI screen even if “Memory Guard” is set to

“On”.

■ HDMI Set (HDMI settings)

Use this feature to adjust the HDMI support audio.

Support Audio (Support audio)

Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI

audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component

connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this

unit.

• This unit transmits audio and video signals input at the HDMI

input jacks to HDMI OUT jack only when this unit is turned on

even if “Support Audio” is set to “Other”.

• Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the

connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of

each connected component.

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,

bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,

bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU on the remote

control.

2 Press

k / n repeatedly to select “Signal

Info.”.

The audio information of the current input source

appears in the GUI screen.

3 Press

l / h repeatedly to select “Audio

Info.” or “Video Info.”.

The information is also appears in the front panel display.

Press 4l / h repeatedly to change the displayed

information.

Choice Functions

Auto

Automatically detects the type of audio input

signals and selects the appropriate audio input

jack select setting.

Last

Automatically selects the last audio input jack

select setting used for the connected input

source.

Choice Functions

Auto

Automatically detects the type of input signals

and select the appropriate decoder mode setting.

Last

Automatically selects the last decoder mode

setting used for the connected input source.

Choice Functions

Auto Automatically detects the input digital audio

signals and activates the appropriate decoder.

Last Automatically selects the last decoder mode

selected “EXTD Surround” in “Sound”.

Choice Functions

Off

Turns off the “Memory Guard” feature.

Protects the following parameters

– sound field program parameters

– all GUI menu parameters

– all speaker levels

Choice Functions

RX-V3800

Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The

HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI input

jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI

component connected to the HDMI OUT jack

on the rear panel of this unit.

Other

Plays back HDMI audio signals on another

HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT

jack.

Notes

Signal Info.

(Input signal information)

99 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) screen

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Audio Info. (Audio information)

• “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding

information.

• Some high definition audio bitstream contents may not include

the discrete surround back left and right channel signals but are

encoded at the bitrate of 192 kHz.

• Even if you make settings to output bitstreams directly, some

players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus

bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams, while converting the

DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

bitstreams to the DTS bitstreams.

■ Video Info. (Video information)

Use this feature to select the language of the menu items

and messages that appears in the GUI (graphical user

interface) screen of this unit.

Choices: English (English), (Japanese),

Français (French), Deutsch (German),

Español (Spanish), Русский (Russian)

You can also select the GUI language using the “GUI

LANGUAGE” parameter in “ADVANCED SETUP” in the front

panel display (see page 126).

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU on the remote

control.

The top display appears.

2 Press

n repeatedly to select “Language”

and then press

3 Press

k / n repeatedly to select the

language of your choice.

4 Press

ENTER to confirm your selection.

Format

Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a

digital signal, it automatically switches to

analog input.

Sampling

The number of samples per second taken from

a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.

Channel

The number of source channels in the input

signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a

multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front

channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

Bitrate

The number of bits passing a given point per

second.

Dialogue

The dialogue normalization level preset to the

current input bitstream signal (see page 138).

Flag1/Flag2

Flag data encoded in the bitstream, or PCM

signals that cue this unit to automatically

switch decoders (“Surround EX”, etc.).

Notes

HDMI Signal

Type of the source video signals and

the video signals output at the HDMI

OUT jack of this unit.

HDMI Resolution

Resolution of the input signal (analog

or HDMI) and the output signal

(HDMI).

Analog Resolution

Resolution of the source video signals

and the analog video signals output at

the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT

jacks of this unit.

HDMI Error

(HDMI Message)

Error message for HDMI sources or

connected HDMI devices. See

page 131 for details.

Language

Français

English

System Memory

Signal Info.

Language

SAVING AND RECALLING THE SYSTEM SETTINGS (SYSTEM MEMORY)

100 En

Use this feature to save up to six of your favorite settings

that can be easily recalled when needed. You can save the

following system setting parameters:

* The settings of “Dynamic Range”, “LFE Level”, “Tone

Control”, and the tonal quality control for headphones are not

saved.

■ Saving by the

SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons

You can save the system settings stored in “Memory1” to

“Memory4” by pressing the corresponding

SYSTEM

MEMORY buttons.

Press and hold one of the

SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons on the remote control for 4 seconds.

“MEMORY 1 SAVE Done” (example) appears in the front

panel display, and then this unit saves the current system

setting to the corresponding memory number.

If system settings are already saved in the selected memory

number, this unit overwrites the old system settings.

■ Saving by the SET MENU operation

You can save the system settings stored in “Memory1” to

Memory6” by using the “System Memory” menu in “SET

MENU”.

1 Press

SET MENU on the remote control.

The top menu appears in the GUI.

2 Press 4k / n repeatedly to select “System

Memory” and then press 4h.

The “System Memory” menu appears in the GUI.

3 Press 4k / n to select “Save” and then press

4h.

The following menu appears in the GUI.

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)

Saved parameters Page

“Stereo/Surround” parameters

“Volume” parameters

(except “Initial Volume”)

“Sound” parameters* (except “EXTD

Surround” and “Channel Mute”)

“Video” parameters (except “Short Message”)

“Basic” parameters

“Front Panel Disp.” parameters

“Support Audio”

Currently selected sound field program (or the

Pure Direct mode)

45, 51

Tonal quality control settings*

Saving the current system settings

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Note

SYSTEM MEMORY

Stereo/Surround

Input Select

Manual Setup

Auto Setup

System Memory

Sound

Video

Basic

NET/USB

Option

Load

Save

Current

Memory1

Memory2

Memory3

Memory4

Current

Memory1

Memory2

Sci-Fi

SpeakerCH 4/3/0.1

LFE Level 0dB

D-Range MAX

PEQ YPAO Natural

Current system parameters

101 En

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

4 Press 4k / n repeatedly to select the desired

memory number (“Memory1” to “Memory6”)

and then press 4h.

“Save: ENTER” appears in the GUI.

• If system settings are already stored in the selected

memory number, the stored system parameter settings

appear in the menu screen.

• If system settings are already saved in the selected

memory number, this unit overwrites to old system

settings.

• If you save the system settings to “Memory1” to

“Memory4”, you can load the stored settings by pressing

the corresponding

SYSTEM MEMORY buttons (see

page 101).

5 Press

ENTER to save the current system

settings to the selected memory number.

You can cancel the saving by pressing 4l.

6 Press

SET MENU again to exit from GUI

screen.

■ Loading by the

SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons

You can recall the system settings stored in “Memory1” to

“Memory4” by pressing the corresponding

SYSTEM

MEMORY buttons.

1 Press one of the

SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons on the remote control to select the

desired memory number.

“MEMORY 1 LOAD” (example) appears in the front

panel display.

“EMPTY” appears in the front panel display if no system

settings are stored in the selected memory number.

2 Press the selected

SYSTEM MEMORY

button once more to confirm the selection.

This unit loads the settings stored in the selected

memory number.

Current

Memory1

Memory2

Memory3

Memory Empty

Save: ENTER

Current

Memory1

Memory2

Memory3

Recital/Opera

SpeakerCH 5/4/0.1

LFE Level 0dB

D-Range MAX

PEQ Reset

Stored system parameters in the selected

memory number

Loading the stored system settings

• Before performing the following operations, set the

operation mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

• This unit overwrites the stored settings to the current

settings of this unit. If you do not want to erase the current

settings, save the current settings to any System Memory

number in advance.

SYSTEM MEMORY

102 En

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)

■ Loading by the SET MENU operation

1 Press

SET MENU on the remote control.

The top menu appears in the GUI.

2 Press

k / n repeatedly to select “System

Memory” and then press

The “System Memory” menu appears in the GUI.

3 Press

k / n to select “Load” and then

press 4h.

The following menu appears in the GUI.

4 Press

k / n repeatedly to select the desired

memory number where the system settings

are stored and then press

Once “Load: ENTER” appears in the GUI, press

4ENTER to confirm the loading.

You can cancel the loading by pressing 4l.

5 Press

SET MENU to exit from GUI screen.

■ Example 1: Comparing the results of the

automatic setup and manual setup

This unit is equipped with three types of parametric

equalizer settings (see page 40), and you can also make

your customized configuration of the sound settings of this

unit by using the “Manual Setup” parameters (see

page 85). To compare the results of the automatic setup or

your manual configuration, use the NSYSTEM

MEMORY buttons.

Saving each setting

Carry out the following procedure when all the parameters are set

to default values.

1 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for

four seconds.

This unit stores the current settings of this unit to

“Memory1”.

2 Perform the automatic setup.

Set “Equalizing” to “Check:Natural”. See page 40 for

details.

3 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the results of the automatic setup

performed in step 2 to “Memory2”.

4 Perform the automatic setup again.

This time, set “Equalizing” to “Check:Front”.

5 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 3 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the results of the automatic setup

performed in step 4 to “Memory3”.

Current

Memory1

Memory2

Sci-Fi

SpeakerCH 3/2/0.1

LFE Level 0dB

D-Range MAX

PEQ YPAO Natural

Memory1

Memory2

Memory3

Memory4

Memory5

Pure Direct

SpeakerCH 5/4/0.1

LFE Level 0dB

D-Range MAX

PEQ YPAO Flat

Using examples

Note

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SYSTEM MEMORY 1

The current settings of this unit

SYSTEM MEMORY 2

The results of the automatic setup

(Equalizing: Check:Natural)

SYSTEM MEMORY 3

The results of the automatic setup

(Equalizing: Check:Front)

103 En

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Example 2: Switching the settings for

different room environments

The tonal characteristics of the listening room may vary

depending on the situations of the room (for example,

whether the curtains are open or closed), and the settings

of this unit should be arranged for each situation of the

room. You can switch between the settings of this unit

easily by using NSYSTEM MEMORY buttons.

Saving each setting

1 Close the curtains of the listening room and

then perform the automatic setup.

See page 37 for details of the automatic setup.

2 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the settings for the current room

situation (i.e. the curtains are closed) to “Memory1”.

3 Open the curtains of the listening room and

the perform the automatic setup.

4 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the current room situation (i.e. the

curtains are open) to “Memory2”.

■ Example 3: Saving the sound

configurations for specific sources

The desired sound configurations are different for each

input source. For example, if you use the sound field

program “Village Vanguard” for a music source of a live

jazz performance, the parameter settings may differ when

the input source is a vinyl record or an SACD. You can

store the sound settings for each input source.

Saving each setting

See page 76 for the sound field program parameter settings.

1 Start playback of the desired live jazz

performance recorded on the SACD.

2 Set the sound field program to “Village

Vanguard” and then adjust the parameters

for the current playback sources.

3 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the current sound field program

settings to “Memory1”.

4 Change the input source to “PHONO” and

then start playback of the desired live jazz

performance recorded on the vinyl record.

5 Adjust the sound field program parameters

for the current playback source.

6 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the current sound field program

settings to “Memory2”.

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SYSTEM MEMORY 1

The settings when the curtains of the

listening room are closed

SYSTEM MEMORY 2

The settings when the curtains of

the listening room are open

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SYSTEM MEMORY 1

The “Village Vanguard” program configured

for the SACD sources

SYSTEM MEMORY 2

The “Village Vanguard” program configured for

the vinyl record sources

104 En

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)

■ Example 4: Switching multiple audio and

video synchronization settings

If you use two different kinds of video monitors or

projectors, and these components are not compatible with

the automatic audio and video synchronization feature,

you should set “Manual” in “Lipsync” for each

component. You can switch between the different

“Manual” in “Lipsync” settings by using the NSYSTEM

MEMORY buttons.

Saving each setting

In the following example, the LCD video monitor and one input

component (for example, VCR) are connected to the S VIDEO

input jack and S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, and the video

projector and the other input component (for example, DVD

player) are connected to one of the HDMI IN jacks and HDMI

OUT jack.

1 Start playback of the desired video source on

the connected LCD video monitor and then

adjust “Manual” in “Lipsync” appropriately

(see page 87).

2 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the audio and video synchronization

settings for the LCD video monitor to “Memory1”.

3 Change the input source to the component

connected to one of the HDMI IN jacks and

then start playback.

4 Adjust “Manual” in “Lipsync” appropriately.

5 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the audio and video synchronization

settings for the video projector to “Memory2”.

Note

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SYSTEM MEMORY 1

The settings for the LCD video monitor

connected to the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack

SYSTEM MEMORY 2

The settings for the video projector connected

to the HDMI OUT jack

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

105 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha

and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code

for each input source (see page 107).

■ Controlling this unit

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP to control this

unit.

*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the

operation mode selector position.

*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component

operation mode selector is set to DAMP.

■ Controlling a TV

Set the operation mode selector to

TV to control your

TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate

remote control code for DTV or PHONO (see page 107).

When you set the remote control codes for both DTV and

PHONO, priority is given to the one set for DTV.

*1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the

operation mode selector position.

*2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode

selector is set to DTV. For details, see the “TV” column on

page 106.

Remote control features

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

Notes

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

NET RADIO

USB

PC/MCX

VOLUME

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

3D DSP

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

NET/USB

–

ENTER

TITLE

MUTE

ENT

SYSTEM MEMORY

TV VOL

MEMORY

POWER

–

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

RETURN

Set to AMP

Notes

Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV

TV POWER Turns on or off the power.

TV VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume

level.

TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.

TV INPUT Changes the input source.

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

NET RADIO

USB

PC/MCX

VOLUME

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

3D DSP

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

NET/USB

–

ENTER

TITLE

MUTE

ENT

SYSTEM MEMORY

TV VOL

MEMORY

POWER

–

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

RETURN

Set to TV

106 En

Remote control features

■ Controlling other components

Set the operation mode selector to DSOURCE to control

other components selected with the input selector buttons

(1). You must set the appropriate remote control code for

each input source in advance (see page 107). The

following table shows the function of each control button

used to control other components assigned to each input

selector button (1). Be advised that some buttons may

not correctly operate the selected component.

The remote control has 14 modes (input areas) to control

components so that the remote control can operate up to 14

different components.

*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.

*2 These buttons operate your video recorder (DVD recorder etc.) only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see

page 107).

*3 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the operation mode selector position.

VOLUME

STRAIGHT

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

NET/USB

–

ENTER

TITLE

MUTE

TV VOL

POWER

–

AUDIO

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

NET RADIO

USB

PC/MCX

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

3D DSP

ENTER

TITLE

MUTE

ENT

SYSTEM MEMORY

MEMORY

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

RETURN

[

]

[

]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

[7]

[2]

Set to SOURCE

Blu-ray Disc/

HD DVD

player/

recorder

DVD player/

DVD

recorder

VCR

Cable TV/

Satellite

tuner

TV LD player CD player

MD recorder/

CD recorder

Tape deck Tuner

[1] AV P OW E R

Power

DVR power

Power

[2] CH + TV

channel up

Channel up Channel up Channel up

channel up

CH –

TV channel

down

TV channel

down

Channel

down

Channel down Channel down

TV channel

down

TV channel

down

TV channel

down

TV channel

down

TV channel

down

[3] TITLE Title Title Title Title Title Band

[4] ENTER Menu enter Menu enter Menu select Menu select

PRESET/CH k Menu up Menu up Menu up Menu up

Preset up

(1 to 8)

PRESET/CH n Menu down Menu down Menu down Menu down

Preset down

(1 to 8)

A-E/CAT. l Menu left Menu left Menu left Menu left

Preset down

(A to E)

A-E/CAT. h Menu right Menu right Menu right Menu right

Direction

A/B

Preset up

(A to E)

[5] RETURN,

MEMORY

Return Return Return Return Return

[6] 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

[7] ll

backward

DVR search

backward

DVR search

backward

hh Search forward

forward

DVR search

forward

DVR search

forward

b Skip backward

Skip

backward

Chapter/Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Direction

back

a Skip forward Skip forward

Chapter/Skip

forward

Skip forward Skip forward

Direction

forward

REC Rec (recorder)

Disc skip (player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec

DVR rec

Disc skip Rec Rec

s Stop Stop Stop

DVR stop

Stop Stop Stop Stop

e Pause Pause Pause

DVR pause

Pause Pause Pause Pause

p Play Play Play

DVR play

Play Play Play Play

[8] MENU Menu Menu Menu Menu

[9] AUDIO Audio Audio Audio

[10] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

[11] ENT Enter Enter/recall Enter

Notes

107 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Selecting a component to be controlled

You can select a component to be controlled

independently of the input source selected with the input

selector buttons.

Press

SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the

desired component.

The name of the component to be controlled appears in the

display window (B) on the remote control.

■ Controlling optional components

(Option mode)

“OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be

programmed with remote control functions independently

from any input source. This area is useful for

programming commands that are to be used only as a part

of a macro function or for components that do not have a

valid remote control code.

To select the option mode, press

SELECT n

repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display

window (B) on the remote control.

You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See

page 109 to program buttons operated within this component

control area.

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area. For a complete list of available remote

control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at

the end of this manual.

The following table shows the default component

(Library: component category) and the remote control

code for each input area.

Remote control code default settings

You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a

Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case,

try setting another Yamaha remote control code.

Note

Setting remote control codes

Input area

Library

(component

category)

Manufacturer

Default

code

XM TUNER Yamaha 2604

NET/USB TUNER Yamaha 2607

TUNER TUNER Yamaha 2602

CD CD Yamaha 2300

CD-R CD-R Yamaha 2400

MULTI CH

DVD Yamaha 2100

MD/TAPE MD Yamaha 2500

DVD DVD Yamaha 2100

BD/HD DVD DVD Yamaha 2100

PHONO TV — —

DTV/CBL TV — —

DVR DVR Yamaha 2807

VCR VCR — —

V-AUX/

DOCK

TUNER Yamaha 2606

Note

108 En

Remote control features

1 Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button (

) to select the input area you want

to set up.

2 Press and hold

LEARN for about 3

seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the name of the

selected input area (ex. DVD) appear alternately in

the display window (B) on the remote control.

• You can set a remote control code of a different type of

component to an input area. Press

l / h repeatedly to

change the library (component category).

Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR,

L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),

L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable),

L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR

• If you want to setup for another input area, press the input

selector button, or press

SELECT k / n repeatedly to

select the input area.

• Be sure to press and hold

LEARN for at least 3

seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.

3 Press

ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected component

appears in the display window (B).

“0000” appears in the display window (B) if no code has

been set.

4 Press the numeric buttons (6) to enter the

four-digit remote control code for the

component you want to use.

For a complete list of available remote control codes,

refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of

this manual.

5 Press

ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window (B) on the

remote control if setting was successful.

“NG” appears in the display window (B) on the

remote control if the setting was unsuccessful. In this

case, start over from step 3.

If you continuously want to set up another code for another

component, press the input selector button, or

BSELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then

repeat steps 2 through 5.

6 Press

LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

7 Press

p or AV POWER to confirm

whether you can control your component

using the remote control.

If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your

component has more than one code, try each of them until you

find the correct one.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (B) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

• The supplied remote control does NOT contain ALL possible

codes for commercially available audio and video components

(including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible

with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote

control function using the learn feature (see “Programming

codes from other remote controls” on page 109) or use the

remote control supplied with the component.

• Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over

remote control code functions.

Notes

Note

Notes

109 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can program remote control codes from other remote

controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program

functions not included in the basic operations covered by

the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control

code is not available. You can program the function of

other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas

in the following illustration. The buttons can be

programmed independently for each input area.

The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most

of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some

special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the

operating instructions for the other remote control.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button (

) to select an input area.

Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to

SOURCE.

When you set the operation mode selector to

AMP and

program a remote control codes from other remote controls, the

programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this

unit.

2 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm

(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control

on a flat surface so that their infrared

transmitters are aimed at each other.

3 Press

LEARN using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“LEARN” and the name of the selected input area

(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window

(B) on the remote control.

• Do not press and hold

LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control

code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 3.

4 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

“LEARN” appears in the display window (B) on the

remote control.

Programming codes from other

remote controls

Note

VOLUME

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAN

LEVEL

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

NET/USB

–

TITLE

MUTE

TV VOL

POWER

–

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

NET RADIO

USB

PC/MCX

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

3D DSP

ENTER

TITLE

MUTE

ENT

SYSTEM MEMORY

MEMORY

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

RETURN

Set to

SOURCE

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

NET/USB

SOURCE

AMP

Notes

SELECT

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

NET/USB

POWER

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)

Other remote control

LEARN

110 En

Remote control features

5 Press and hold the button you want to

program on the other remote control until

“OK” appears in the display window (B) on

the remote control.

“NG” appears in the display window (B) on the

remote control if learning was unsuccessful. In this

case, start over from step 4.

• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4

and 5.

• If you continuously want to program another function for

another component, press

SELECT k / n to select the

component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5.

6 Press

LEARN again to exit the learning

mode.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (B) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.

However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may

appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this

case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room

for further learning.

• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:

– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other

components are weak.

– when the distance between the two remote controls is too

great or too small.

– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each

other at the appropriate angle.

– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.

– when the function to be programmed is continuous or

uncommon.

You can change the name of the input source that appears

in the display window (B) on the remote control if you

want to use a different name from the factory preset. This

feature is useful when you have set an input area to control

a different component.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button (

) to select the input area you want

to rename.

The name of the selected input area appears in the

display window (B).

2 Press

RENAME using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, start over from step 2.

Notes

SELECT

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

NET/USB

POWER

Other remote control

LEARN

Changing source names in the

display window

Note

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

NET/USB

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

RENAME

111 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

3 Press

k / n to select and enter a character.

Pressing

n changes the character as follows:

A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),

/ (slash), and space. Pressing

k changes the

characters in reverse order.

4 Press

h to move the cursor to the next

position.

Press

l to move the cursor to the previous position.

5 Press

ENTER to set the new name.

“OK” appears in the display window (B) on the

remote control if renaming was successful. “NG”

appears in the display window (B) on the remote

control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case,

start over from step 3.

If you continuously want to rename another input area, press

the input selector button, or press

SELECT k / n

repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 3

through 5.

6 Press

RENAME again to exit the renaming

mode.

“ERROR” appears in the display window (B) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

The macro programming feature makes it possible to

perform a series of operations with the press of a single

button. For example, when you want to play a CD,

normally you would turn on the components, select the

CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The

macro programming feature lets you perform all of these

operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The

buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with

macro programs. You can also program your own macros

(see page 113).

■ MACRO operations

1 Set the

MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON.

2 Press the desired macro button.

3 Set the

MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF

when you finish to using the macro

programming operation.

• While the remote control is running a macro program, it does

not accept any other operation until it has completed running

the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing).

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation is complete.

Note

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

RENAME

Macro programming features

Notes

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

NET/USB

POWER

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

NET RADIO

USB

PC/MCX

SU CO

ENT

MACRO

MACRO ON/OFF

Macro buttons

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

MACRO

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

MACRO

112 En

Remote control features

■ Default macro functions

*1 You can turn on some components (including Yamaha components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC

OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For

details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.

*2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 107), you can turn on the power of

your TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO.

*3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.

*4 Playback can be started for any Yamaha remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, Blu-ray

Disc player, HD DVD player or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play

button on the input area of that component (see page 109) or set a remote control code (see page 107) in advance.

Pressing macro

button

To automatically transmit these signals in order

First Second Third

—

(*1)

—

(CD area) (*4)

(CD-R area) (*4)

—

(MD/TAPE area) (*4)

(DVD area) (*4)

(BD/HD DVD area) (*4)

—

(DVR area) (*4)

(VCR area) (*4)

—

STANDBY STANDBY

POWER

(*1)

POWER

(*2)

POWER

NET/USB

POWER

NET/USB

TUNER

POWER

TUNER

(*3)

CD CD

CD-R CD-R

MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN

MD/TAP

DVD DVD

BD/HD DV

PHONO PHONO

DTV/CBL DTV/CBL

DVR DVR

VCR VCR

V-AUX/DOCK V-AUX/DOCK

113 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Programming macro operations

You can program your own macro and use the macro

programming feature to transmit several remote control

commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to

set up remote control codes or perform learning operations

before programming the macro.

• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again

when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default

macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.

• We do not recommend programming continuous operations

such as volume control in a macro.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press

MACRO using

a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window (B) on the

remote control.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.

2 Press the macro button you want to use to

operate the macro.

The macro button name (ex. “M;DVD”) and the

selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear

alternately in the display window (B) on the remote

control.

“AGAIN” appears in the display window (B) if you press a

button other than a macro button.

3 Press the buttons for the functions you want

to include in the macro operation in

sequence.

You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you

have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote

control automatically exits the macro mode.

Example

Set the input source to DVD

→ Activate the DVD

player

→ Set the sleep timer

Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press DVD.

Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press AV POWER.

Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press SLEEP.

To change the selected input area, press

SELECT k / n.

Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,

whereas

SELECT k / n only changes the selected input

area.

4 Press

MACRO again using a ballpoint pen

or similar object when the operation

sequence you want to program is complete.

“ERROR” appears in the display window (B) if you press more

than one button simultaneously.

Notes

Note

MACRO

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

Note

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

NET/USB

POWER

Indicates the

number of macro

steps entered

Flashes alternately so you can set the

next step

114 En

Remote control features

You can clear all changes made in each function set, such

as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names

and setup remote control ID.

■ Clearing function sets

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press

CLEAR by

using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“CLEAR” appears in the display window (B).

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, start over from step 1.

2 Press

k / n to select the clear mode.

L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area) Clears all learned

functions in the respective input area. The name

of a component is shown after a semicolon (;).

Press an input selector button to select the input

area.

L;AMP Clears all learned functions for controlling the

amplifier functions of this unit.

L;ALL Clears all learned functions.

M;ALL Clears all programmed macros.

RNAME Clears all renamed source names.

FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the

remote to the factory settings.

3 Press and hold

CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

“WAIT” appears in the display window (B). If

clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the

display window (B) on the remote control.

Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button

reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you

have set remote control codes).

• “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to

complete.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window (B) if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (B) if you press a

button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more

than one button simultaneously.

4 Press MCLEAR again to exit.

Clearing configurations

Note

CLEAR

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

Notes

CLEAR

115 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Clearing a learned function

You can clear the function learned for a certain button in

each control area.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button (

) to select the input area containing

the function you want to clear.

The selected component name appears in the display

window (B).

2 Press

LEARN using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name (ex.

“DVD”) appear alternately in the display

window (B).

• Do not press and hold

LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote

control code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.

3 Press and hold

CLEAR using a ballpoint

pen or similar object and then press the

button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C;OK” appears in the display window (B) if

clearing was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the

display window (B) on the remote control, release

the ballpoint pen or similar object used to press

CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote

control returns to the learning mode.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 3.

• If you continuously want to clear another function for

another component, press

SELECT k / n to select the

input area, and then repeat step 3.

• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the

factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have

set remote control codes).

4 Press

LEARN again to exit.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window (B) on the remote

control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from

step 2.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (B) if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

Notes

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

NET/USB

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

LEARN

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

116 En

Remote control features

■ Clearing a macro function

You can clear the function programmed for a certain

macro button.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press

MACRO using

a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window (B) on the

remote control.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.

2 Press and hold

CLEAR using a ballpoint

pen or similar object, then press the macro

button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C;OK” appears in the display window (B) on the

remote control if clearing was successful.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 2.

• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts

to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you

have set remote control codes).

3 Press

MACRO again to exit the macro

programming mode.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window (B) on the remote

control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from

step 2.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (B) on the remote

control if you press more than one button simultaneously.

Note

MACRO

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

V-AUX/DOCK

Notes

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION

117 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio/video system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to

set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone, second zone (Zone 2) and third zone (Zone 3). You can

control this unit from the second or third zone using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in Zone 2 and/or Zone 3.

• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in Zone 2

and/or Zone 3 to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).

• An amplifier and speakers for Zone 2 and/or Zone 3.

• A video monitor for the second room

• You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with

your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.

■ Using external amplifiers

To use an external amplifier in Zone 2 or Zone 3, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT terminals and select

“EXT” in “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” (see page 97).

• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

• Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room when “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” are set to

“Fixed” (see page 97).

Using multi-zone configuration

Connect the source component to the analog audio input jacks of this unit to play back the source in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

This unit does not output the audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT and HDMI jacks to the ZONE OUT jacks.

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components

Notes

OUTOUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

This unit

Yamaha component

Infrared signal

receiver

MAIN

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

Infrared signal

emitter

DVD player etc.

Amplifier

Remote control

Analog audio signals only

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Second zone

(Zone 2)

Third zone

(Zone 3)

Main zone

This unit

From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2) jacks

From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 3) jacks

To the REMOTE IN jack

To the REMOTE IN jackFrom the REMOTE OUT jack

From the ZONE OUT (ZONE VIDEO) jack

Infrared signal

receiver

118 En

Using multi-zone configuration

■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit

If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals and select either “INT:[SP1]” or

“INT:[SP2]” for “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” (see page 97).

If you want to use two internal amplifiers (SP1 and SP2) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 and Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals and select “Both” for “Zone2

Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” (see page 97).

You can select the zone you want to control by using the

control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.

■ Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3

Front panel operations

1 Press

ZONE 2 ON/OFF or

ZONE 3

ON/OFF on the front panel to individually

turn on or off Zone 2 or Zone 3.

2 Press

ZONE CONTROLS on the front

panel repeatedly to select the zone you want

to control.

Each time you press

ZONE CONTROLS, the

front panel display changes as shown below, and the

indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for

approximately 10 seconds. However, no indicator

flashes when the main zone is selected.

ZONE2

Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions.

ZONE3

Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions.

• You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the

selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,

the currently selected zone mode is automatically

canceled. In this case, press

ZONE CONTROLS

again.

• The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3

are turned on.

Important safety notice

The SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or

more than one loudspeaker per channel.

Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low

impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.

Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This

information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.

–

SP2

SINGLE

–

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

Third zone

(Zone 3)

This unit

Second zone

(Zone 2)

Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3

ZONE2

ZONE3

No indicator flashes when the main zone is

selected.

119 En

Using multi-zone configuration

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

3 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone

2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of

Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of

the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or

“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or

Zone 3” on page 120 to perform further

operations.

Remote control operations

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SELECT k repeatedly to

select the zone you want to control.

“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display

window (B) on the remote control.

2 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone

2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of

Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of

the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or

“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or

Zone 3” on page 120 to perform further

operations.

3 Press

SELECT k / n to exit from the

Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.

■ Turning on or off Zone 2 and/or Zone 3

using the remote control

POWER and

STANDBY on the remote control

work differently depending on the selected zone that

appears in the display window (B) on the remote control.

• When the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is

selected (see page 119), you can turn on the main zone,

Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode

individually.

• When the all mode is selected, pressing

POWER

turns on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3

simultaneously and pressing

STANDBY sets them

to the standby mode simultaneously.

• When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN”

appears for a few seconds when

POWER or

STANDBY

is pressed.

• “ALL” appears in the display window (B) on the remote

control only when

SELECT n is pressed.

■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press one of the input selector buttons

(

)) to select the input source of the selected

zone.

If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2;

name of the selected input area” or “3; name of the

selected input area” is displayed in the display window

(B) on the remote control when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is

selected respectively.

• The selected input sources are shared across all zones.

• If you set the recording source other than “SOURCE” (see

page 70), the input source of Zone 2 is fixed to the source you

set as the recording source.

• This unit does not display the iPod or network/USB menu on

the video monitor connected to one of the ZONE VIDEO jacks.

• You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the

selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the

currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this

case, press

ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel again.

• When a video monitor is connected to one of the ZONE VIDEO

jacks, you can display the control information of Zone 2 or

Zone 3 and XM Satellite Radio information on the video

monitor screen. Set “Zone OSD” to “Zone2&Zone3” or

“Zone2” (see page 96).

SELECT

SOURCE

AMP

Control mode Display window (B)

POWER

and

STANDBY

Main zone

mode

Name of the selected

input area

Turns on the main

zone only or sets it to

the standby mode.

Zone 2 mode

“ZONE 2” or “2;name

of the selected input

area”

Turns on Zone 2 or

sets it to the standby

mode.

Zone 3 mode

“ZONE 3” or “3;name

of the selected input

area”

Turns on Zone 3 or

sets it to the standby

mode.

All mode

“ALL”

POWER: turns on

the main zone, Zone

2 and Zone 3.

STANDBY: sets

the main zone, Zone

2 and Zone 3 to the

standby mode.

Notes

120 En

Using multi-zone configuration

■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Rotate RVOLUME on the front panel (or press

CVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume level of the

selected zone.

Press

MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to

the selected zone.

When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3,

VOLUME +/– can be used only when “Zone2 Volume” or

“Zone3 Volume” is set to “Variable” in “Zone2 Set” or “Zone3

Set” (see page 97).

■ Adjusting the balance of the speaker

level in Zone 2 or Zone 3

Press

TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select

“BALANCE” and then rotate OPROGRAM to

adjust the balance of the front left and right

speaker level of the selected zone.

■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP and

then press CH +/– on the remote control to

adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or

TV VOL +/– to adjust the low-frequency

response (BASS) respectively.

You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using

TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see

“Adjusting the tonal quality” on page 51.

Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display

window (B) of the remote control before you adjust the tonal

quality of the corresponding zone (see page 119).

■ Using Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control

You can control Zone 2 or Zone 3 features by using the

supplied Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control. First, set the ID1/

ID2 switch and ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch appropriately.

Controlling the amplifier function

1 XM

Selects XM as the input source of the controlling zone.

2 Input selector buttons

Selects the desired input source for the controlling zone.

8 ID1/ID2 switch

Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2 (see

page 124).

0 POWER

Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3.

This button is operational only when

MASTER ON/OFF on

the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

A STANDBY

Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode.

This button is operational only when

MASTER ON/OFF on

the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2

or Zone 3 operation mode.

Note

–

TV VOL

–

SOURCE

AMP

TREBLE

BASS

Note

TUNER

CD-R

MD/TAPE DVD

BD/HD DVD

NET/USB

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX/DOCK

DVR

POWER

STANDBY

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET

VOLUME

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

ID2

ID1

NUMBER

CAT.

ALL

PRESET

DISPLAY

MUTE

ENT

121 En

Using multi-zone configuration

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

B VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3.

C MUTE

Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press again to

restore the audio output to the previous volume level.

G ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch

Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that

of Zone 3.

Controlling the tuner function (see page 53)

3 PRESET k / n

Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when

the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see

page 55).

4 A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the preset station groups (A to E) (see

page 55).

Controlling the XM Satellite Radio tuning

function (see page 56)

2 Numeric buttons

(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)

Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.

(Preset Search mode)

Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.

While holding down 9NUMBER (see page 121), press the

numeric buttons to enter the desired channel numbers directly

when this unit is in the All Channel Search or Category Search

mode.

5 A-E/CAT. l / h

(All Channel Search mode)

Changes the channel category.

(Category Search mode)

Changes the channel category.

(Preset Search mode)

Changes the preset channel group (A to E).

6 PRESET/CH k / n

(All Channel Search mode)

Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold

for quick search.

(Category Search mode)

Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press

and hold for quick search.

(Preset Search mode)

Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).

7 ALL

Selects the All Channel Search mode as the search mode

(see page 58).

9 NUMBER

Press and hold before you press the numeric buttons to

switch the function to entering the three-digit channel

number in the All channel Search mode or Category

Search mode (see page 58).

D DISPLAY

Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as

channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or

song title displayed in the front panel display or on the

video monitor (see page 60).

E CAT.

Selects the Category Search mode as the search mode (see

page 58).

F PRESET

Selects the Preset Search mode as the search mode (see

page 58).

Select “TUNER” as the input source of the controlling zone

to use the following functions

Select “XM” as the input source of the controlling zone to use

the following functions.

ADVANCED SETUP

122 En

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional

operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each

parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

• The settings you make are reflected next time you press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see

page 33).

•Only

MASTER ON/OFF,

STRAIGHT and the

PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup

menu.

• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.

• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.

1 Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front

panel to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

2 Press and hold PSTRAIGHT on the front

panel and then press

MASTER ON/OFF

inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector on the

front panel to select the parameter you want

to adjust.

The name of the selected parameter appears in the

front panel display.

4 Press

STRAIGHT on the front panel

repeatedly to change the selected parameter

setting.

5 Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front

panel to release it outward to the OFF

position to save the new setting and turn off

this unit.

The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on

this unit.

■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.

Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit

so that it matches that of your speakers.

Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN

• Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .

• Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .

■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signal-

receiving capability of the remote control sensor on the

front panel of this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” if you want to activate the signal-

receiving capability of the remote control sensor.

• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the signal-

receiving capability of the remote control sensor.

We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases.

Advanced setup

Notes

Using the advanced setup menu

SPEAKER

IMP.

Speaker Impedance level

8ΩMIN

Front

The impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

6ΩMIN

Front

The impedance of each

speaker must be 4 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 6 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

Note

123 En

Advanced setup

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Wake on RS-232C access

RS-232C STANDBY

Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-

232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode.

Choices: YES, NO

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES

[Other models]: NO

• Select “YES” to set this unit to transmit data via the

RS-232C interface.

• Select “NO” to set this unit not to transmit data via the

RS-232C interface.

■ Remote control AMP ID

RC AMP ID

Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote

control recognition.

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library

code is set to “2001”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library

code is set to “2002”.

Setting remote control AMP ID code

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE.

2 Press and hold

LEARN for about 3

seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar

object and then press

l / h repeatedly

until “L;AMP” appears in the display window

(B) on the remote control.

• Be sure to press and hold

LEARN for at least 3

seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.

3 Press

ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected input area

appears in the display window (B) on the remote

control.

4 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

four-digit remote control AMP ID code for the

input area you want to use.

*1 The remote control setting.

*2 The setting of this unit.

5 Press

ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window (B) if the

setting was successful.

“NG” appears in the display window (B) if the

setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from

step 2.

6 Press

LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

Notes

LEARN

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

Remote

control AMP

ID code

Function

RC AMP ID

2001

(initial setting)

Operates this unit using the

default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2002

Operates this unit using an

alternative code.

ID2

A-E/CAT.

PRESET/CH

ENTER

LEARN

124 En

Advanced setup

■ Remote control TUNER ID

RC TUNER ID

Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for

remote control recognition.

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID

library code is set to “2602”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID

library code is set to “2603”.

Setting remote control TUNER ID

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press

TUNER on

the remote control to select the tuner to

change the remote control ID.

2 Press and hold

LEARN for about 3

seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar

object until “L;TUN” and “TUNER”

alternately appear in the display window (B).

• Be sure to press and hold

LEARN for at least 3

seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.

3 Press

ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected input area

appears in the display window (B) on the remote

control.

4 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

four-digit remote control code for the input

area you want to use.

*1 The remote control setting.

*2 The setting of this unit.

5 Press

ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window (B) if the

setting was successful.

“NG” appears in the display window (B) if the

setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from

step 2.

6 Press

LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

Notes

LEARN

3 seconds

Remote

control

TUNER ID

code

Function

RC TUNER

2602

(initial setting)

Operates this unit using the

default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2603

Operates this unit using an

alternative code.

ID2

LEARN

125 En

Advanced setup

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Remote control XM ID RC XM ID

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote

control recognition.

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID library

code is set to “2604”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID library

code is set to “2605”.

Setting remote control XM ID

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press

XM on the

remote control to select the XM to change the

remote control ID.

2 Press and hold

LEARN for about 3

seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar

object until “L;TUN” and “XM” alternately

appear in the display window (B) on the

remote control.

• Be sure to press and hold

LEARN for at least 3

seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.

3 Press

ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected input area

appears in the display window (B) on the remote

control.

4 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

four-digit remote control code for the input

area you want to use.

*1 The remote control setting.

*2 The setting of this unit.

5 Press

ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window (B) if the

setting was successful.

“NG” appears in the display window (B) if the

setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from

step 2.

6 Press

LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

Notes

LEARN

3 seconds

Remote

control XM

ID code

Function

RC XM ID

2604

(initial setting)

Operates this unit using the

default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2605

Operates this unit using an

alternative code.

ID2

See page 122 for the operation of the advanced setup.

LEARN

126 En

Advanced setup

■ Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP

(Asia and General models only)

Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according

to the frequency spacing in your area.

Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50

• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South

America.

• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.

■ Bi-amplifier setting BI-AMP

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier

function.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-amplifier

function.

• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-amplifier

function.

When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SURROUND BACK

terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in

that the SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the

bi-amplifier connection (see page 19).

■ Parameter initialization INITIALIZE

Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the

initial factory settings. You can select the category of

parameters to be initialized.

Choices:DSP PARAM, VIDEO, NETWORK, ALL,

CANCEL

• Select “DSP PARAM” to initialize all the parameters

of the sound field parameters (see page 74).

• Select “VIDEO” except “Short Message” and “On

Screen” (see page 90).

• Select “NETWORK” to initialize the network and USB

parameters (see page 94).

• Select “ALL” to initialize all the parameters of this

unit.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization

procedure.

• Use “Initialize” in the sound field program menu to initialize

the parameters of the desired program (see page 80).

• When the network settings are reset, “DHCP” in “NET/USB” is

automatically set to “On” (see page 94) and the registered client

ID of this unit on your Yamaha MCX-2000 is cleared (see

page 67).

■ TV format TV FORMAT

Use this feature to set the color encoding format of your

television.

Choices: NTSC, PAL

Initial setting:

[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models]: NTSC

[Other models]: PAL

This parameter setting only affects the video monitor connected

to the MONITOR OUT jacks and does not affect the Zone 2

video monitor connected to the ZONE 2 VIDEO jacks.

■ HDMI monitor check

MONITOR CHECK

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check

function of this unit. When “MONITOR CHECK” is set to

“YES”, this unit receives the information of the available

video signal resolutions from the video monitor connected

via HDMI and you can only select the resolutions

supported by the video monitor in “HDMI Resolution”

(see page 90). When “MONITOR CHECK” is set to

“SKIP”, you can select any resolution in “HDMI

Resolution”.

Choices: YES, SKIP

■ GUI language GUI LANGUAGE

Use this feature to select the language of your choice that

appears in the GUI (graphical user interface) menu of this

unit.

Choices:ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese),

FRENCH (French), GERMAN (German),

SPANISH (Spanish), RUSSIAN (Russian)

Note

Notes

Note

TROUBLESHOOTING

127 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

■ General

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit fails to turn

on or enters the

standby mode soon

after the power is

turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly.

—

The speaker impedance setting is

incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this

unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire

for each connection does not touch anything other

than its respective connection.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

or strong static electricity).

Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the

power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then

use it normally.

—

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

23-30

Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,

“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”.

Audio input jack select is set to

“ANALOG” while the input source

component outputs digital audio signals.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO” or

“COAX/OPT”.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the

INPUT

selector on the front panel (or the input selector

buttons (1) on the remote control).

41, 42

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

—

The sound is muted.

Press

MUTE or

VOLUME +/– on the remote

control to resume audio output and then adjust the

volume.

Signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being input from a source component,

such as a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this

unit.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP

copy protection standards.

“Support Audio” is set to “Other” and

“HDMI” audio signals are not being

played back on this unit.

Set “Support Audio” to “RX-V3800” in “Option”.

No picture. The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Set “Conversion” to “On” or connect your source

components in the same way as you connect your

video monitor to this unit.

This unit outputs the video signals are not

supported on the video monitor connected

to the HDMI OUT jack.

Set the “INITIALIZE” to “VIDEO” to reset the video

parameters.

126

Set “MONITOR CHECK” to “YES”.

126

Pure Direct mode is active. Turn off the Pure Direct mode.

Non-standard video signals are input.

128 En

Troubleshooting

Short message

displays do not

appear in the video

monitor.

“Short Message” is set to “Off”. Set “Short Message” to “On”.

“Conversion” is set to “Off”. Set “Conversion” to “On”.

The signals input at the HDMI input jacks

are being output at the HDMI OUT jack.

HDTV video signals are being input.

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.

33, 122

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.

—

The sound is muted.

Press

MUTE or

VOLUME +/– on the remote

control to resume audio output.

Sound is heard from

the speaker on one

side only.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Incorrect settings in “Speaker Level”. Adjust the “Speaker Level” settings.

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound is heard

from the center

speaker.

“Center” in “Speaker Set” is set to “None”.

Set “Center” to “Small” or “Large”.

One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for

“7ch Stereo”) has been selected and

analog 2-channel source is being input

Try another sound field program if you want to output

sound from the center speaker.

No sound is heard

from the presence

speakers.

The sound field programs are turned off.

Press

STRAIGHT to turn them on.

You are using a source or program

combination that does not output sound

from all channels.

Try another sound field program.

No sound is heard

from the surround

speakers.

“Surround” in “Speaker Set” is set to “None”.

Set “Surround” to “Small” or “Large”.

This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode

and a monaural source is being played

back.

Press

STRAIGHT on the front panel so that

“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel

display.

No sound is heard

from the subwoofer.

“Bass Out” in “Speaker Set” is set to

“Front” when a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being played.

Set “Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Both”.

“Bass Out” in “Speaker Set” is set to

“SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel

source is being played.

Set “Bass Out” to “Both”.

The source does not contain low-

frequency signals.

No sound is heard

from the surround

back speakers.

“Surround” in “Speaker Set” is set to

“None” and “Surround Back” is

automatically set to “None”.

Set “Surround” and “Surround Back” to a setting

other than “None”.

“Surround Back” in “Speaker Set” is set to

“None”.

Set “Surround Back” to a setting other than “None”.

CINEMA DSP 3D mode is active. Set the CINEMA DSP 3D mode to “OFF”. 50

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

129 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

The audio input

sources cannot be

played in the desired

digital audio signal

format. (Desired input

source indicator or

decoder indicator in

the front panel

display does not light

up.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital

signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operating

instructions for your component.

—

Audio input jack select is set to

“ANALOG”.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”.

A humming sound is

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cable of the turntable to the

GND terminal of this unit.

The volume level is

low while a record is

being played.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

Connect the turntable to this unit through an MC-

head amplifier.

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the AUDIO

OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned

off.

Turn on the power of the component.

—

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack.

The source component is not connected to

the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

24, 27

Some components cannot record Dolby

Digital or DTS sources.

A source cannot be

recorded by an analog

component connected

to the AUDIO OUT

(REC) jacks.

The source component is not connected to

the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO

IN jacks.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings of this

unit cannot be

changed.

“Memory Guard” in “Option” is set to

“On”.

Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”.

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

—

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears in the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

—

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then

turn it back on.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

130 En

Troubleshooting

■ Tuner

■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multi-path interference.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned into.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Preset the stations again.

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for the best reception.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Supplied AM loop antenna is not

connected.

Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even

if you use an outdoor antenna.

Noises can result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

—

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.

—

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

CHECK ANTENNA

XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock are not

connected to the XM jack of this unit or

do not work properly.

Check XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock connections

and orient for the best reception level.

UPDATING

The XM user encryption code is being

updated.

Wait until the encryption code is updated.

—

NO SIGNAL

The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of Home Dock

for the best reception level.

It takes longer than 4 seconds for audio or

text data to be decoded.

Wait until the decoding process has finished.

—

OFF AIR

The XM Satellite Radio channel you

selected is not currently broadcasting any

signals.

Check the channel number again or select another

XM Satellite Radio channel.

—

<XM> - - -

The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer

available.

- - - / - - -

No artist name or song title is available.

<CAT> - - -

No channels are available for the selected

category.

Select another channel category by pressing

CATEGORY on the front panel (or

A-E/CAT.

l / h on the remote control) repeatedly.

131 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Remote control

■ HDMI

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

The batteries do not last long and get

quickly exhausted.

Using alkaline batteries is strongly recommended.

—

The operation mode selector is set

incorrectly.

Set the operation mode selector correctly.

When operating this unit, set it to the

AMP

position. When operating the component selected by

the input selector button, set it to the

SOURCE

position. When operating the TV set in the DTV or

PHONO area, set it to the

TV position.

—

The remote control code was not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using

“List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

107

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer

using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

107

The library code of the remote control and

the remote control ID of this unit do not

match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit with the

corresponding remote control library code.

107

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Program the necessary functions independently into

the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.

109

The remote control

does not learn new

functions.

The batteries of this remote control and/or

the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries.

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper distance.

109

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Learning is not possible.

—

Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for

the new functions.

114

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

Device Over

The number of the connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

Reduce the number of the connected HDMI

components.

—

HDCP Error

HDCP authentication failed.

Check that the connected HDMI components support

the HDCP copy protection standards.

—

132 En

Troubleshooting

■ Network and USB

HDMI Message Cause Remedy

See

page

Out of Resolution The connected monitor is not compatible

with the resolution of the input video

signal or input video signal is the analog

component video signal with 1080p of

resolution.

Set the resolution of the video output signal of the

input source component appropriately.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The PC server/MCX-2000/

Internet Radio does not

function properly.

The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.

Alternately, perform manual configuration

according to the current operating environment.

The network cable is not connected. Connect it properly.

The music in the PC

server cannot be played

back.

The PC does not have Windows Media

Player 11 or Windows Media Connect

2.0 installed in it.

Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows

Media Connect 2.0 in the PC.

—

The music is recorded in a format that

cannot be played on this unit. This unit

cannot play music formats other than

WMA, MP3 and WAV (PCM format).

Also note that it cannot play certain

music files even if these are recorded in

the WMA, MP3 or WAV format.

Play music recorded in a format that this unit is

compatible with.

—

The music is copyright-protected. This unit cannot play copyright-protected music.

—

Windows Media Player 11

or Windows Media

Connect 2.0 cannot be

connected.

The Windows XP PC is logging on to a

domain.

Log on to the local machine instead of the

domain.

—

The MusicCAST server

cannot be connected.

You are attempting to connect to

MCX-1000. The MusicCAST server that

can be connected by this unit is

MCX-2000.

Use MCX-2000 or the PC server.

—

Auto Configuration is not executed. Execute “Auto Configure”.

“Disconnected” is

displayed even when a

USB device is present.

This unit recognized the USB device as

an illegal device.

Turn this unit off then on again.

The Internet Radio cannot

be played.

The firewall of the network device is

activated. The Internet Radio can be

played only when it passes through the

port designated by each radio station.

The port number is variable depending

on radio station.

Check the firewall setting of the network device.

—

Connection to the Internet is

disconnected.

Check the configuration of the network device,

and then contact the network connection provider.

—

The music files and

directories in the USB

device cannot be viewed.

The music files and directories are placed

in locations other than the FAT area.

Place music files and directories in the FAT area.

—

You are attempting to browse directory

hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory

with more than 500 files.

Modify the data structure on your USB device.

—

133 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

The USB device cannot

be recognized.

The connected USB device is other than

a USB mass storage class USB memory

device or USB portable audio player.

This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage

class USB memory device or USB portable audio

player. Also note that it cannot recognize certain

USB devices even when they are devices as

described above.

Some devices may become easier to recognize

when they are inserted before turning this unit on.

This unit does not recall

the correct item by using

numeric buttons (1-8).

The connected USB device is incorrect. Connect the USB device that stores the preset

item.

The directory that stores the selected item

is changed.

Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8)

again.

This unit does not recall

the selected item by using

numeric buttons (1-8).

The USB device is not connected

correctly.

Connect the correct USB device properly.

The PC or MCX-2000 that stores the

selected item is turned off.

Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.

The selected Internet Radio station is

temporary unavailable or out of service.

Try again when the selected Internet Radio is

providing the service.

Preset other Internet Radio stations.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Please wait

This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your network.

This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a

while.

—

This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your USB memory

device or USB portable audio player.

This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a

while.

—

Please wait

(Starting Server)

This unit is in the middle of waking up

MCX-2000 that has been set to the

standby mode.

Wait for approximately 20 seconds.

—

Connect error

There is a problem with the signal path

from your network to this unit.

Check the connection between this unit and the

LAN port on your router or hub.

Make sure your router is properly connected and

turned on. Also, make sure your modem is

properly connected and turned on when you are

attempting to listen to Internet Radio.

Disconnected

Your USB memory device or USB

portable audio player has been

disconnected from the USB port of this

unit.

Check the connection between this unit and your

USB memory device or USB portable audio

player.

—

The PC server or MCX-2000 previously

connected to this unit no longer exists.

Connect this unit to the available PC server or

MCX-2000.

There is a problem with the signal path

from your USB memory device or USB

portable audio player to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB

memory device or USB portable audio player to

the USB port of this unit.

Try resetting your USB memory device or USB

portable audio player.

—

134 En

Troubleshooting

Access error

This unit cannot access your USB

memory device or USB portable audio

player.

Try another USB memory device or USB portable

audio player.

—

There is a problem with the signal path

from your USB memory device or USB

portable audio player to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB

memory device or USB portable audio player to

the USB port of this unit.

Try resetting your USB memory device or USB

portable audio player.

—

Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your PC.

Make sure Windows Media Connect 2.0 is

installed on your PC.

—

Check that the songs currently stored on your PC

are playable (MP3, WMA, and WAV).

—

Store some other playable music files (MP3,

WMA, and WAV) on your PC.

—

The network may be overloaded with

heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted.

Try preparing a network exclusively for use with

this unit to separate it from general network

traffic.

—

List updated The list of the contents stored on your PC

server or MCX-2000 has been updated.

Bookmark ON

The desired Internet Radio station has

been added to the “Bookmarks” list.

Bookmark OFF

The stored Internet Radio station has

been removed from the “Bookmarks”

list.

Empty Memory!

No items are assigned to the selected

numeric button.

Assign the desired item to the numeric button.

Not found!

This unit cannot find the assigned item

for the selected numeric button.

Connect the USB device that stores the preset

item.

Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.

Try again when the selected Internet Radio is

providing the service.

Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8)

again.

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

135 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ iPod

In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and on the video monitor, check the connection to

your iPod (see page 30).

■ Auto Setup

Before Auto Setup

Note

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Loading... This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring

song lists from your iPod.

Connect error There is a problem with the signal path

from your iPod to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod

universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Try resetting your iPod.

—

Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by

this unit.

Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod

mini are supported.

—

iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a

Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the

YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the

DOCK terminal of this unit, and the

connection between your iPod and this

unit is complete.

Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha

iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold

separately) connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit.

Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your iPod.

Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod

are playable.

—

Store some other playable music files on your iPod.

—

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.

—

No Setup Menu! All setup menu are set to “Skip”. Set the desired menu item to “Check”. 39

Memory Guard! “Memory Guard” is set to “On”. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 98

136 En

Troubleshooting

During Auto Setup

After Auto Setup

• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “Auto Setup” again.

• If warning “W2” or “W3” appears, the adjustment are made, however the adjustments may not be optimal.

• Depending on the speakers, warning “W1” may appears even if the speakers connections are correct.

• If error “E10” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified Yamaha service center.

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 15

E02:No Sur. SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 15

E03:No PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 15

E04:SBR→SBL Only right surround back channel signal is

detected.

Connect the surround back speaker to the

SURROUND BACK SINGLE terminal if

you only have one surround back speaker.

E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet

environment.

—

Turn off noisy electric equipment like air

conditioners or move them away from the

optimizer microphone.

—

E06:Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

Connect surround speakers when you use

surround back speakers.

E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the “Auto Setup” procedure.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

E08:No Signal The optimizer microphone does not detect

test tones.

Check the microphone setting. 37

Check the speaker connections and

placement.

E09:User Cancel The “Auto Setup” procedure was cancelled

due to user activity.

Run “Auto Setup” again. 37

E10:Internal Err. An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 37

Warning message Cause Remedy

See

page

W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is not correct. This

message may appear depending on the

speakers even when the speakers are

connected correctly.

Check the speaker connections for proper

polarity (+ or –).

W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

Bring the speaker closer to the listening

position.

—

W3:Level Error The difference of volume level among

speakers is excessive.

Readjust the speaker installation so that all

speakers are set in locations with similar

conditions.

—

Check the speaker connections. 15

Use speakers of similar quality.

—

Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 37

W4:SP Mismatch The result of the wiring check of “Auto

Setup” is different from “Speaker Set” in

“Manual Setup”.

Use “Speaker Set” in “Manual Setup” to

adjust the speaker settings manually.

Notes

RESETTING THE SYSTEM

137 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.

• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup

menu parameters will not be initialized.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.

To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release

it outward to the OFF position.

1 Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front

panel to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

2 Press and hold

STRAIGHT and then

press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON

position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP”

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to select

“INITIALIZE”.

4 Press

STRAIGHT repeatedly to select

“ALL”.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure

without making any changes.

• You can initialize the video parameters or sound field

program parameters separately. See page 126 for details.

5 Press

MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to confirm your

selection and turn off this unit.

Resetting the system

Notes

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

INITIALIZE

CANCEL

INITIALIZE

ALL

GLOSSARY

138 En

■ Audio and video synchronization

(lip sync)

Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a

technical term that involves both a problem and a

capability of maintaining audio and video signals

synchronized during post-production and transmission.

Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex

end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an

automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows

devices to perform this synchronization automatically and

accurately without user interaction.

■ Bi-amplification connection

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a

speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section

of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the

combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement

each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range.

This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much

simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence

the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the

speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high

pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes

frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above

the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes

frequencies above its cutoff.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB

and P

R signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. The component signal is

also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A

monitor with component input jacks is required in order to

output component signals.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal

is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:

color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite

video jack on a video component transmits these three

elements combined.

■ Deep Color

Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in

displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of

the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows

HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to

billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding

for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between

colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many

times more shades of gray between black and white. Also

Deep Color increases the number of available colors

within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color

space.

■ Dialogue normalization

Dialogue Normalization is a feature of Dolby Digital or

DTS, which is used to keep the programs at the same

average listening level so that the user does not have to

change the volume control between Dolby Digital or DTS

programs.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3

front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system

has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1

channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround

speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and

surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby

Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to

minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels

and the precise sound orientation generated using digital

sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented

excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound

environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel

configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a

matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby

Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks

recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-

over” and “fly-around” effects.

Glossary

139 En

Glossary

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology

developed for high-definition programming and media

including HD broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc.

Selected as a mandatory audio standard for HD DVD and

as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this

technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete

channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby

Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels

simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and

designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/

amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains

fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio

systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.

This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel

playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center

channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of

only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology. There are three modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie

sources and “Game mode” for game sources.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete

multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel

sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”

for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for

2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game

sources.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is

widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,

and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby

Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital

signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the

volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects

and directionality.

■ Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including

HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory

audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio

standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound

that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a

high-definition home theater experience. Supporting

bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8

discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the

optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the

future, Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with

the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the

metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog

normalization and dynamic range control.

■ DSD

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio

signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio

CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at

a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while

noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce

distortion, a common occurrence with very high

quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling

rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered

by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality

for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully

backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers

to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz

sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.

DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original

96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-

quality full-motion video for music programs and motion

picture soundtracks on DVD video.

■ DTS Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a

home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of

sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital

surround in your home. This system produces practically

distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left and

right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1

(subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit

incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel

reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the

existing 5.1-channel format.

140 En

Glossary

■ DTS Express

DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the

optional feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which

offers high-quality, low bit rate audio optimized for

network streaming, and Internet applications. DTS

Express is used for the Secondary Audio feature of Blu-

ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD. These

features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the

additional commentaries made by the director of a film)

on demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express

signals are mixed down with the main audio stream on the

player component, and the component sends the mixed

audio stream to the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital

coaxial, digital optical, or analog connections.

■ DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio

technology developed for high-definition disc-based

media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a

mandatory audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray

Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit

identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition

home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0

Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,

DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete

channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the

optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the

future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully

compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.

■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution

audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based

media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as

an optional audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray

Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually

indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-

definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up

to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1

discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the

optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the

future, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains

fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio

systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.

■ HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first

industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video

interface. Providing an interface between any source (such

as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video

monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports

standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as

multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI

transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-

channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to

accommodate future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth

Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure

audio/video interface that meets the security requirements

of content providers and system operators. For further

information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The

frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low-frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ MP3

One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It

employs the irreversible compression method, which

achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data

of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be

capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11

(128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to

music CD.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There

are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources

and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.

141 En

Glossary

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Neural-THX Surround

“Neural-THX

” Surround is taking surround sound to the

next level. This revolutionary new technology delivers the

rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround

sound in a format that is fully compatible with stereo.

Neural-THX Surround reduces the bandwidth needed for

broadcasters to deliver true, multi-channel surround

presentations, and enables 7.1-channel support for gaming

and movies. By unmasking the audio details, typically lost

by other playback systems, audiences will experience the

deep ambience and subtle details of movies, music and

games. And with this technology being used by sound

designers during content creation, as well as embedded

into playback devices, Neural-THX Surround promises a

listening experience that is true to the original mix.

Neural-THX Surround has been chosen as the official

surround sound broadcast format for XM Satellite Radio’s

“XM HD Surround”, as well as other leading FM/HD

radio stations worldwide. For additional information,

please visit http://www.neuralsurround.com/.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code

Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can

be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,

while the dynamic range representing the sound level

difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.

In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider

the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the

higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the

sound level can be reproduced.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the

S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss

and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

■ WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the

method of recording the digital data obtained by

converting audio signals. It does not specify the

compression (coding) method so a desired compression

method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible

with the PCM method (no compression) and some

compression methods including the ADPCM method.

■ WMA

An audio compression method developed by Microsoft

Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression

method, which achieves a high compression rate by

thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human

ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data

quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a

similar audio quality to music CD.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION

142 En

■ Elements of a sound field

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable

us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

There are two distinct types of sound reflections that

combine to make up the sound field in addition to the

direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s

instrument.

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).

Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the

clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberations taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a

concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any

size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is

exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field

processor.

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for

acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured

data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual

experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your

own home by using the Yamaha original sound field

technology combined with various digital audio systems.

■ CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the

information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate

height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate

and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening

room.

■ SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound field so that

accurate representations of all the sound field programs

can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm

that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects

even without any surround speakers by using virtual

surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual

CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that

does not include a center speaker.

■ Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit

enhances your listening experience by regenerating the

missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result,

flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency

fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-

frequency bass is compensated, providing improved

performance of the overall sound system.

■ Sound output from each speaker

Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of

audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the

table below to understand the speaker layout for each

sound field program. For details about the sound output

from each speaker in sound field programs, refer to

“Sound output in each sound field program” in

“APPENDIX” at the end of this manual.

Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from

speakers depending on the type of input source being played

back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be

used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of

movies, such as special sound effects, etc.

Except for “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you

can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back

speakers (see page 45).

Sound field program information

Note

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION

143 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

This unit employs Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the

Parametric EQ settings (see page 85), to optimize the

frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to

match your listening environment. YPAO uses a

combination of the following three parameters

(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise

adjustment of the frequency characteristics.

■ Frequency

This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave

increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz.

■ Gain

This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB

between –20 and +6 dB.

■ Q factor

The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as

the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the

values 0.5 and 10.

YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your

listening requirements using a combination of the above

three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each

equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit

has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.

The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise

adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).

This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as

in Figure 1).

Figure 1

Figure 2

Parametric equalizer information

Gain

Frequency

Original frequency

characteristic

Band 1

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Gain

Frequency

Band 1

Band 2

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Original frequency

characteristic

SPECIFICATIONS

144 En

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 140 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

Front L/R 8/6/4/2 Ω ...................................... 170/205/265/345 W

• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)

[Asia, General, China and Korea models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 185 W

• Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................................... 200 W

• Dynamic Headroom

8 Ω ..................................................................................... 0.84 dB

• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

Front L/R 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 145 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

Front L/R 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................ 150 or more

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Voltage

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................... 2.4 V or more

• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance

OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω

PRE OUT ................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 2.0 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................ 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ................................ 150 mV/100 Ω

• Frequency Response

CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct ........... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to OUT (REC)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .......................................... 0.02% or less

CD, etc. to Front L/R

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R

[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ..................... 81 dB or more

[Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more

CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ........................... 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more

CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ... 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Tone Control (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer)

BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 3.5 kHz

• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control

BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 450 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 2.0 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back, Presence: Small)

.................................................................................. 12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Format [MONITOR OUT] (Wall Paper)

[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ............ NTSC/PAL

[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models]

.................................................................................. PAL/NTSC

• Video Format (Video Conversion)

......................................................................................... NTSC/PAL

• Signal Level

Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)

Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)

• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)

............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)

.................................................................................... 60 dB or more

• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]

Component (Video Conversion Off)

............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

• Video Format [ZONE OUT] (Gray Back)

[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ..................... NTSC

[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models] ....... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf)

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 0.2/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)

Stereo .................................................................................... 42 dB

• Frequency Response

Stereo ............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω

Specifications

145 En

Specifications

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General and Asia models]

....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA

[Other models] .................................................................... 500 W

• Standby Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less

[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ....................... 0.33 W or less

[Other models] .......................................................... 0.1 W or less

• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only]

6ch, 10% THD .................................................................. 1100 W

• AC Outlets

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)

[Asia, General and China models] ........ 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

[Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum)

[U.K. model] ...................................... 1 (100 W/0.4 A maximum)

[Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm

(17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 17-1/4 in)

• Weight .............................................................. 17.4 kg (38 lbs 6 oz)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

■ HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio

signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio

sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the

following connections:

– multi-channel analog audio input (see page 29)

– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)

• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source

component, and set the component appropriately.

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video

and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of

the DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input

source component appropriately so that the component outputs

the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the

bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied

instruction manuals for details.

• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features

(for example, the special audio contents downloaded via

Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play

back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD

contents.

Video signals

This unit is compatible with the video signals of the

following resolutions:

Video signal format

– 480i/576i

– 480p/576p

– 720p

– 1080i

– 1080p

Refresh rate

– 59.94(60)/50 Hz

This unit also accepts 30 or 36-bit Deep Color video signals.

Audio signal

types

Audio signal

formats

Compatible

media

2ch Linear

PCM

2ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch

Linear PCM

8ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch,

2.8224 MHz,1 bit

SACD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital,

DTS

DVD-Video, etc.

Bitstream (High

definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD,

Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master

Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution

Audio

Blu-ray Disc,

HD DVD, etc.

Notes

The HDMI interface of this unit is based on the

following standards:

• HDMI Version 1.3a (High-Definition Multimedia

Interface Specification Version 1.3a) licensed by

HDMI Licensing, LLC.

• HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection

System) licensed by Digital Content Protection,

LLC.

146 En

■ Numerics

2ch Stereo Direct,

Sound field parameter ...................... 79

2ch STEREO, Sound field programs

...... 49

2-channel stereo direct,

Sound field parameter ...................... 79

3D indicator ......................................... 36

7ch Enhancer Level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 79

7ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 49

7ch Stereo Center Level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 79

7ch Stereo Presence L Level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 79

7ch Stereo Presence R Level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 79

7ch Stereo Sur. Back Level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 79

7ch Stereo Surround L Level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 79

7ch Stereo Surround R Level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 79

7ch STEREO, Sound field programs

...... 49

7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer

effect level, Sound field parameter

..... 79

7-channel stereo center speaker level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 79

7-channel stereo presence left speaker

level, Sound field parameter ............ 79

7-channel stereo presence right speaker

level, Sound field parameter ............ 79

7-channel stereo surround back speaker

level, Sound field parameter ............ 79

7-channel stereo surround left speaker

level, Sound field parameter ............ 79

7-channel stereo surround right speaker

level, Sound field parameter ............ 79

96/24 indicator ..................................... 35

■ A

AC OUTLET(S) .................................. 32

Action Game, Sound field programs

...... 47

Adaptive DRC, Volume ....................... 84

Adaptive DSP effect level, Volume ..... 84

Adaptive DSP Lvl, Volume ................. 84

Adaptive dynamic range control,

Volume ............................................ 84

Advanced setup .................................. 122

Advanced sound configurations ........... 71

Adventure, Sound field programs ........ 49

Albums, network menu ........................ 64

ALL CH SEARCH .............................. 58

All Channel Search mode, XM tuning

.... 58

AM antenna connection ....................... 32

AM tuning ............................................ 53

AMP, Operation mode selector ........... 34

Antenna Level, Input select ................. 81

Antenna level, Input select ................... 81

Artists, network menu .......................... 64

Audio and video synchronization,

Sound ...............................................87

Audio cable plugs .................................20

Audio components connection .............27

Audio Info., Input signal information

.....99

Audio information, Input signal

information .......................................99

Audio input jack select, Input menu ....82

Audio input jacks selection ..................42

AUDIO jacks ........................................20

Audio jacks ..........................................20

AUDIO SELECT .................................42

Audio Select, Input menu .....................82

Audio Select, Option ............................98

Audio signal flow .................................22

Auto Bypass, Tone control ...................87

Auto bypass, Tone control ...................87

AUTO indicator ...................................36

Auto Setup ............................................37

Auto,

Audio and video synchronization ....87

Automatic audio delay adjustment .......87

Automatic preset tuning,

FM/AM tuning .................................54

Automatic tuning, FM/AM tuning .......53

■ B

Back ground video, Input select ...........83

Basic, Manual Setup ............................91

Basic, Manual setup .............................91

Bass control, Tone control ...................86

Bass Cross Over, Speaker settings .......93

Bass cross over, Speaker settings .........93

Bass Out, Speaker settings ...................92

Bass out, Speaker settings ....................92

Bass, Tone control ................................86

Battery charge indicator .......................35

BGV, Input select .................................83

BI-AMP, Advanced setup ..................126

Bi-AMP, Advanced setup ..................126

Blu-ray Disc player connection ............24

Bookmarks, network menu ..................64

■ C

Cable plugs ...........................................20

CAT SEARCH, XM tuning .................58

CD player connection ...........................27

Cellar Club, Sound field programs ......47

CENTER PRE OUT jack connection

.....28

Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........92

Center, Speaker settings .......................92

Chamber, Sound field programs ..........46

Channel Mute, Sound ...........................88

Channel mute, Sound ...........................88

Church in Freiburg,

Sound field programs .......................46

CINEMA DSP indicator ......................36

CLASSICAL, Sound field programs

......46

Component I/P, Video ..........................89

Component interlace/progressive

conversion, Video ............................89

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..............20

Compressed Music Enhancer ...............49

Connection, AM antenna ......................32

Connection, audio components ............27

Connection, Blu-ray Disc player ..........24

Connection, CD player .........................27

Connection, CENTER PRE OUT jack

....28

Connection, DVD player ......................25

Connection, DVD recorder ...................26

Connection, external decoder ...............29

Connection, FM antenna ......................32

Connection, FRONT PRE OUT jack

......28

Connection, iPod ..................................30

Connection, Multi-format player ..........29

Connection, network ............................31

Connection, Power cable ......................32

Connection,

PRESENCE PRE OUT jack .............28

Connection, projector ...........................23

Connection, PVR ..................................26

Connection, set-top box ........................26

Connection,

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ........28

Connection, SURROUND BACK

PRE OUT jack ..................................28

Connection,

SURROUND PRE OUT jack ...........28

Connection, turntable ...........................27

Connection, TV monitor .......................23

Connection, VCR .................................26

Control, Tone control ...........................86

Conversion, Video ................................89

■ D

Decoder descriptions ............................71

Decoder indicators ................................36

Decoder Mode, Input menu ..................82

Decoder mode, Input menu ..................82

Decoder Mode, Option .........................98

Decoder parameter descriptions ...........80

Decoder Type, Sound field parameter

.....76

Decoder Type, Sound field parameter

.....76

Default audio input jack select, Option

......98

Default decoder mode, Option .............98

Default extended surround setting,

Option ...............................................98

Default Gateway, Network settings ......94

Default gateway, Network settings ......94

DHCP setting, Network settings ..........94

DHCP, Network settings ......................94

Dialogue Lift, Sound field parameter

......75

Dialogue lift, Sound field parameter

.......75

DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks ..................20

DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks ...................20

Dimmer, Front panel display setting

.......96

Dimmer, Front panel display setting

.......96

Direct number access mode,

XM tuning ........................................58

Index

147 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Distance, Auto setup parameter ..... 39, 40

DNS Server (P), Network settings ....... 94

DNS Server (S), Network settings ....... 94

DOCK indicator ................................... 35

Drama, Sound field programs .............. 49

DSP effect level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 74

DSP indicators ..................................... 36

DSP Level, Sound field parameter ......74

DTS Neo:6 Music center image,

Decoder parameter ........................... 80

DVD player connection ....................... 25

DVD recorder connection .................... 26

Dynamic Range, Sound ....................... 85

Dynamic range, Sound ......................... 85

■ E

Each speaker settings, Channel mute

...... 88

ENHANCER indicator ........................ 36

ENTERTAINMENT,

Sound field programs ....................... 47

Equalizing, Auto setup parameter

..... 39, 40

EXTD Surround, Decoder parameter

..... 80

EXTD Surround, Option ...................... 98

EXTD Surround, Sound ....................... 88

Extended surround mode,

Decoder parameter ........................... 80

Extended surround, Sound ................... 88

External amplifier connection .............. 28

External decoder connection ................ 29

■ F

Files/Directories, USB menu ............... 64

FM antenna connection ........................ 32

FM tuning ............................................ 53

Front Input,

Multi channel assignment ................ 83

Front left and right channels input jacks,

Multi channel assignment ................ 83

Front Panel Disp., Option .................... 96

Front panel display message scroll,

Front panel display setting ............... 96

Front panel display setting, Option ...... 96

Front panel door ................................... 34

FRONT PRE OUT connection ............ 28

Front, Speaker settings, Front speakers,

Speaker settings ............................... 92

■ G

Genres, network menu ......................... 64

Graphic user interface (GUI) screen .... 73

GUI LANGUAGE, Advanced setup

..... 126

GUI language, Advanced setup ......... 126

GUI screen position, Video ................. 90

■ H

Hall in Amsterdam,

Sound field programs ....................... 46

Hall in Munich, Sound field programs

....... 46

Hall in Vienna, Sound field programs

.... 46

HDMI ................................................... 21

HDMI aspect ratio, Video .................... 90

HDMI Aspect, Video ........................... 90

HDMI Auto, Audio and video

synchronization ................................87

HDMI automatic lip sync mode ...........87

HDMI indicator ....................................35

HDMI monitor check,

Advanced setup ..............................126

HDMI Resolution, Video .....................90

HDMI Set, Option ................................98

HDMI settings, Option .........................98

HDMI video signal resolution, Video

.....90

Headphone dynamic range ...................85

Headphone low-frequency effect level

.......85

Headphones ..........................................42

Headphones indicator ...........................36

Headphones, dynamic range ................85

Headphones,

Low frequency effect level ..............85

Help, network menu .............................64

HiFi DSP indicator ...............................36

■ I

I/O Assignment, Input menu ................82

Information, NET/USB ........................95

Infrared window ...................................34

Init. Delay, Sound field parameter .......76

Initial delay, Sound field parameter .....76

Initial Volume, Volume .......................84

Initial volume, Volume ........................84

INITIALIZE, Advanced setup ...........126

Initialize, Sound field parameter. .........80

Input channel and speaker indicators

......35

Input channel indicators .......................35

Input Channels,

Multi channel assignment ................83

Input channels,

Multi channel assignment ................83

Input Select, GUI menu ........................81

Input select, GUI menu ........................81

Input signal indicators ..........................36

Input signal information, GUI menu

.......98

Input source indicators .........................35

Input/output assignment, Input menu

......82

Internet radio ........................................67

Internet Radio, network menu ..............64

IP Address, Network settings ...............94

IP address, Network settings ................94

iPod Charge on the standby mode,

iPod settings .....................................96

iPod connection ....................................30

iPod settings, Option ............................96

iPod use ................................................62

iPod, Option .........................................96

■ J

Jacks .....................................................20

■ L

LAN connection ...................................31

Language, GUI menu ...........................99

Level, Auto setup parameter ..........39, 40

LFE Level, Sound ................................85

Lipsync, Sound .....................................87

LIVE/CLUB, Sound field programs ....46

Liveness, Sound field parameter ......... 77

Locations, network menu .................... 64

Low-frequency effect level, Sound ..... 85

■ M

MAC Address, Network information

..... 95

MAC address, Network information ... 95

Macro programming, remote control

...... 111

Manual audio delay adjustment ........... 87

Manual preset tuning, FM/AM tuning

.... 54

Manual tuning, FM/AM tuning ........... 53

Manual,

Audio and video synchronization .... 87

MASTER ON/OFF .............................. 33

Max Volume, Volume ......................... 84

Maximum volume, Volume ................. 84

Memory Guard, Option ....................... 98

Memory guard, Option ........................ 98

MEMORY indicator ............................ 36

Mode, Channel mute ........................... 88

MONITOR CHECK,

Advanced setup ............................. 126

Mono Movie, Sound field programs

...... 49

MOVIE, Sound field programs ........... 48

Multi CH Assign, Input menu ............. 83

MULTI CH INPUT

component selection ........................ 42

MULTI CH INPUT jacks .................... 29

Multi channel assignment, Input menu

...... 83

Multi -format player connection .......... 29

Multi-channel source playback

in 2-channel stereo .......................... 52

Multi-channel sources playback

with headphones .............................. 50

Multi-information display ................... 35

MULTI-ZONE configuration,

Zone2, Zone3 ................................ 117

MUSIC ENHANCER,

Sound field category ........................ 49

Music Video, Sound field programs

....... 48

MUTE .................................................. 43

MUTE indicator ................................... 35

Muting ................................................. 43

Muting Type, Volume ......................... 84

Muting type, Volume ........................... 84

■ N

Neo:6 Cinema, Decoder type .............. 72

Neo:6 Music Center Image,

Decoder parameter .......................... 80

Neo:6 Music, Decoder type ................. 72

NET/USB, Manual setup ..................... 94

Network connection ............................. 31

Network feature ................................... 64

Network information, NET/USB ......... 95

Network menu ..................................... 64

Network settings, NET/USB ............... 94

Network status, Network information

.... 95

Network, NET/USB ............................ 94

neural indicator .................................... 36

Neural THX, Decoder type .................. 72

Index

148 En

New Stations, network menu ............... 64

■ O

On Screen, Video ................................. 90

On-screen display time, Video ............. 90

On-screen display, Option ................... 96

Operation mode selector ...................... 34

OPTIMIZER MIC jack ........................ 37

Optimizer microphone ......................... 37

Option, Manual setup ........................... 96

Other components controlling

by Remote control ......................... 106

Other components controlling,

Remote control .............................. 106

■ P

Parameter initialization,

Advanced setup ............................. 126

Parametric EQ, Sound .......................... 85

Parametric equalizer information ....... 143

Parametric equalizer level,

Auto setup parameter ................. 39, 40

Parametric equalizer, Sound ................ 85

PC server .............................................. 66

PC/MusicCAST, network feature ........ 64

PHONES jack ...................................... 42

Play Style, NET/USB .......................... 95

Playback basic procedure ..................... 41

Playback styles, NET/USB .................. 95

Playlists, network menu ....................... 64

PLII Game, Decoder type .................... 71

PLII Movie, Decoder type ............. 71, 72

PLII Music, Decoder type .................... 71

PLIIx Game, Decoder type .................. 71

PLIIx Movie, Decoder type ........... 71, 72

PLIIx Music and PLII Music Center

Width, Decoder parameter ............... 80

PLIIx Music and PLII Music Dimension,

Decoder parameter ........................... 80

PLIIx Music, Decoder type .................. 71

Podcasts, network menu ...................... 64

Popular Stations, network menu .......... 64

Position, Video ..................................... 90

Power cable connection ....................... 32

PR/SB Priority, Speaker settings ......... 93

Presence and surround back speaker

indicators ......................................... 35

PRESENCE PRE OUT

jack connection ................................ 28

Presence speakers, Speaker settings .... 92

Presence, Speaker settings ................... 92

Presence/surround back speaker priority,

Speaker settings ............................... 93

Preset channel setting, XM tuning ....... 59

Preset Search mode, XM tuning .......... 58

Preset stations exchange,

FM/AM tuning ................................. 55

Preset stations selection ....................... 55

Primary DNS server, Network settings

...... 94

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music

center width, Decoder parameter

....... 80

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music

Dimension, Decoder parameter

.......... 80

PRO LOGIC, Decoder type .................71

Projector connection ............................23

PURE DIRECT ....................................51

Pure hi-fi sound ....................................51

PVR connection ...................................26

■ R

RC AMP ID, Advanced setup ............123

RC TUNER ID, Advanced setup .......124

RC XM ID, Advanced setup ..............125

Recall Play, network menu ..................64

Recital/Opera, Sound field programs

......48

RECOUT indicator ..............................35

Remote control AMP ID,

Advanced setup ..............................123

Remote control code default settings

....107

Remote control codes settings ............107

Remote control TUNER ID,

Advanced setup ..............................124

Remote control XM ID,

Advanced setup ..............................125

REMOTE IN jack ................................30

REMOTE OUT jack ............................30

REMOTE SENSOR, Advanced setup

..122

Remote sensor, Advanced setup ........122

Rename, Input menu ............................83

Repeat ...................................................63

Repeat iPod playback ...........................63

Repeat, Playback styles ........................95

Resetting the system ...........................137

Rev. Delay, Sound field parameter ......78

Rev. Level, Sound field parameter .......78

Rev. Time, Sound field parameter .......77

Reverberation delay, Sound field

parameter .........................................78

Reverberation level,

Sound field parameter ......................78

Reverberation time,

Sound field parameter ......................77

Roleplaying Game,

Sound field programs .......................47

Room Size, Sound field parameter ......76

Room size, Sound field parameter .......76

RS-232C STANDBY,

Advanced setup ..............................123

■ S

S VIDEO jacks .....................................20

SB. Init. Delay,

Sound field parameter ......................76

SB. Liveness, Sound field parameter

......77

SB. Room Size,

Sound field parameter ......................76

Sci-Fi, Sound field programs ...............48

Scroll, Front panel display setting ........96

Secondary DNS server,

Network settings ..............................94

Selection, Audio input jacks ................42

Selection, MULTI CH INPUT

component ........................................42

Server, network menu ..........................64

Set-top box connection .........................26

Setup, Network settings ........................94

Short message display, Video ..............90

Short Message, Video ...........................90

Shortcut buttons,

Network/USB feature .......................68

Shuffle ..................................................63

Shuffle iPod playback ..........................63

Shuffle, Playback styles .......................95

Signal Info., GUI menu ........................98

SILENT CINEMA ...............................50

SILENT CINEMA indicator ................36

Size, Auto setup parameter .............39, 40

SLEEP indicator ...................................36

Sleep timer ............................................43

Songs, network menu ...........................64

Sound field indicators ...........................36

Sound field parameter descriptions ......76

Sound field programs ...........................45

Sound field programs

with headphones ...............................50

Sound field programs

without surround speakers ................50

Sound, Manual Setup ...........................85

Sound, Manual setup ............................85

SOURCE, Operation mode selector

........34

Speaker distance,

Auto setup parameter .................39, 40

Speaker Distance, Basic .......................93

Speaker distance, Basic ........................93

Speaker dynamic range ........................85

SPEAKER IMP., Advanced setup .....122

Speaker impedance setting ...................33

Speaker impedance, Advanced setup

....122

Speaker level adjusting .........................52

Speaker Level, Basic ............................94

Speaker level, Basic .............................94

Speaker low-frequency effect level ......85

Speaker Set, Basic ................................91

Speaker settings, Basic .........................91

Speaker size,

Auto setup parameter .................39, 40

Speaker wiring,

Auto setup parameter .................39, 40

Speakers Dynamic range ......................85

Speakers, Low-frequency effect level

........85

Specifications .....................................144

Spectacle, Sound field programs ..........48

Sports, Sound field programs ...............47

Standard, Sound field programs ...........48

Standby Charge, iPod settings ..............96

Standby mode, Zone2, Zone3 .............119

Status, Network information ................95

STEREO indicator ................................36

Stereo program parameter descriptions

......79

STEREO, Sound field programs ..........49

Stereo/Surround menu, GUI menu .......74

Stereo/Surround, GUI menu .................74

STRAIGHT ..........................................50

Straight Compressed Music Enhancer effect

level, Sound field parameter

...............79

Straight Enhancer Level,

Sound field parameter ......................79

Index

149 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Straight Enhancer,

Sound field program ........................ 49

STRAIGHT mode ................................ 50

Subnet Mask, Network settings ........... 94

Subnet mask, Network settings ............ 94

Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ...... 93

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

jack connection ................................ 28

Supplied accessories .............................. 4

Support Audio, HDMI settings ............ 98

Support audio, HDMI settings ............. 98

SUR. DECODE, Decoder category ..... 71

Sur. Init. Delay,

Sound field parameter ...................... 76

Sur. Liveness, Sound field parameter

..... 77

Sur. Room Size,

Sound field parameter ...................... 76

Surround back initial delay,

Sound field parameter ...................... 76

Surround back left/right speakers,

Speaker settings ............................... 92

Surround back liveness,

Sound field parameter ...................... 77

SURROUND BACK PRE OUT

jack connection ................................ 28

Surround back room size,

Sound field parameter ...................... 76

Surround Back, Speaker settings ......... 92

Surround initial delay,

Sound field parameter ...................... 76

Surround left/right speakers,

Speaker settings ............................... 92

Surround liveness,

Sound field parameter ...................... 77

SURROUND PRE OUT

jack connection ................................ 28

Surround room size,

Sound field parameter ...................... 76

Surround, Speaker settings .................. 92

SWFR Phase, Speaker settings ............ 93

System ID, Network information ......... 95

System Memory ................................. 100

System memory ................................. 100

System, Network information .............. 95

■ T

Test Tone, Basic .................................. 91

Test tone, Basic .................................... 91

Test Tone, Parametric EQ .................... 86

Test tone, Parametric EQ ..................... 86

The Bottom Line,

Sound field programs ....................... 47

The Roxy Theatre,

Sound field programs ....................... 47

Tonal quality adjusting ........................ 51

Tone Control, Sound ............................ 86

Tone control, Sound ............................. 86

Tone control, Tone control .................. 86

TRANSMIT indicator .......................... 34

Treble control, Tone control ................ 87

Treble, Tone control ............................ 87

Troubleshooting ................................. 127

TUNED indicator ................................. 36

Tuner frequency step,

Advanced setup ..............................126

TUNER FRQ STEP, Advanced setup

......126

Tuner indicators ...................................36

Turning off ...........................................33

Turning on ............................................33

Turntable connection ............................27

TV controlling by Remote control .....105

TV controlling, Remote control .........105

TV FORMAT, Advanced setup .........126

TV format, Advanced setup ...............126

TV monitor connection ........................23

TV, Operation mode selector ...............34

■ U

Unit, Speaker distance ..........................94

Unprocessed input sources ...................50

USB feature ..........................................64

USB memory device ............................68

USB menu ............................................64

USB portable audio player ...................68

USB, USB menu ..................................64

■ V

VCR connection ...................................26

VIDEO AUX jacks ..............................30

Video conversion, Video ......................89

Video Info., Input signal information

......99

Video information, Input signal

information .......................................99

VIDEO jacks ........................................20

Video jacks ...........................................20

Video Manual setup .............................89

Video signal flow .................................22

Video sources in the background .........43

Video, Manual setup ............................89

Village Vanguard,

Sound field programs .......................46

Virtual CINEMA DSP .........................50

VIRTUAL indicator .............................36

VOLTAGE SELECTOR ........................5

VOLUME level indicator .....................35

Volume level,

Auto setup parameter .................39, 40

Volume Manual setup ..........................84

Volume Trim, Input menu ....................82

Volume trimming, Input menu .............82

Volume, Manual setup .........................84

■ W

Wake on RS-232C access,

Advanced setup ..............................123

Wall Paper, Video ................................91

Wall paper, Video ................................91

Warehouse Loft,

Sound field programs .......................46

Wiring, Auto setup parameter ........39, 40

■ X

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ...............56

XM satellite radio activation ................57

XM Satellite Radio display ..................60

XM satellite radio tuning .....................56

■ Y

Yamaha MCX-2000 ............................ 66

YPAO indicator ................................... 36

■ Z

Zone 2 amplifier, Zone 2 setting ......... 97

Zone 2 initial volume,

Zone 2 setting .................................. 97

Zone 2 maximum volume,

Zone 2 setting .................................. 97

Zone 2 setting, Option ......................... 97

Zone 2 volume, Zone 2 setting ............ 97

Zone 3 amplifier, Zone 3 setting ......... 97

Zone 3 Initial volume, Zone 3 setting

..... 97

Zone 3 maximum volume,

Zone 3 setting .................................. 97

Zone 3 setting, Option ......................... 97

Zone 3 volume, Zone 3 setting ............ 97

Zone OSD, Option ............................... 96

Zone2 Amplifier, Zone 2 setting ......... 97

Zone2 Initial Vol., Zone 2 setting ....... 97

Zone2 Max Vol., Zone 2 setting .......... 97

Zone2 Set, Option ................................ 97

Zone2 Volume, Zone 2 setting ............ 97

ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators .................. 36

Zone3 Amplifier, Zone 3 setting ......... 97

Zone3 Initial Vol., Zone 3 setting ....... 97

Zone3 Max Vol., Zone 3 setting .......... 97

Zone3 Set, Option ................................ 97

Zone3 Volume, Zone 3 setting ............ 97

“

MASTER ON/OFF” or

“

DVD” (example) indicates the

name of the parts on the front panel

or the remote control. Refer to the

attached sheet or the pages at the

end of this manual for the

information about each position of

the parts.

■ Front panel

ON/OFF

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLU ME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

SLEEP

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

REC OUT/

ZONE2

PROGRAM

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

USB

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

FM/AM

PRESET/

TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

MULTI ZONE

YPAO

SLEEP

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

REC OUT/

ZONE2

PROGRAM

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

USB

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

FM/AM

PRESET/

TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

MULTI ZONE

YPAO

BNAC

DEFG H IJ MKL

QPO

APPENDIX

■ Remote control

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

NET RADIO

USB

PC/MCX

VOLUME

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

3D DSP

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

NET/USB

–

ENTER

TITLE

MUTE

ENT

SYSTEM MEMORY

TV VOL

MEMORY

POWER

–

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

RETURN

CLASSICALLIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

ENHANCERSTEREO

iii

Sound output in each sound field program

Front left speaker Surround left speaker Surround back right speaker

Center speaker Surround right speaker Presence left speaker

Front right speaker Surround back left speaker Presence right speaker

Speaker from which sound is being output

Speaker from which no sound is being output

SBR

C SR PL

SBL

Speaker settings

7-channel 5-channel

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

Speaker settings

7-channel 5-channel

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

APPENDIX

/ / / : OFF

/ / / : ON or discrete 6.1/7.1-channel audio signals are input.

PL x

neural

PL x

neural

Program 3D

PR/SB

Priority

Input audio source

2-channel

(monaural)

2-channel

(stereo)

5.1-channel*

6.1/7.1-

channel*

CLASSICAL

Hall in Munich

Hall in Vienna

Hall in Amsterdam

Church in Freiburg

Chamber

LIVE/CLUB

Village Vanguard

Warehouse Loft

Cellar Club

The Roxy Theatre

The Bottom Line

ON Presence/

Surround

Back

1122

OFF Presence

1124

Surround

Back

1124

ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

Music Video

Recital/Opera

Action Game

Roleplaying Game

MOVIE

STANDARD

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Adventure

Drama

ON Presence/

Surround

Back

2222

OFF Presence

3224

Surround

Back

7424

MOVIE

Mono Movie

ON Presence/

Surround

Back

2222

OFF Presence

3224

Surround

Back

3224

STEREO

2ch Stereo

–– Presence/

Surround

Back

5555

STEREO

7ch Stereo

MUSIC ENHANCER

7ch Enhancer

–– Presence/

Surround

Back

4444

SUR.DECODE

Surround Decoder

(Pro Logic)

(PLII Movie)

(PLII Game)

–– Presence/

Surround

Back

6774

SUR.DECODE

Surround Decoder

(PLII Music)

–– Presence/

Surround

Back

8774

SUR.DECODE

Surround Decoder

(PLIIx Movie)

(PLIIx Game)

(Neo:6 Cinema)

(Neural THX)

–– Presence/

Surround

Back

6474

SUR.DECODE

Surround Decoder

(PLIIx Music)

(Neo:6 Music)

–– Presence/

Surround

Back

8474

STRAIGHT

Pure Direct

MUSIC ENHANCER

Straight Enhancer

–– Presence/

Surround

Back

5574

GPL/LGPL

■ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim

copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and

change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your

freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its

users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s

software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free

Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License

instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General

Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute

copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source

code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in

new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you

these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain

responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you

must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,

receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know

their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this

license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone

understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified

by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is

not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the

original authors’ reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid

the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses,

in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any

patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND

MODIFICATION

0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed

by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this

General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or

work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any

derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program

or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into

another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the

term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this

License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and

the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on

the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that

is true depends on what the Program does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you

receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately

publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;

keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any

warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License

along with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your

option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus

forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications

or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of

these conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you

changed the files and the date of any change.

b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in

part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be

licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this

License.

c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run,

you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most

ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate

you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under

these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.

(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print

such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to

print an announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections

of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered

independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do

not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when

you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the

Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,

whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each

and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work

written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the

distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the

Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution

medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2)

in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above

provided that you also do one of the following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source

code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on

a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any

third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing

source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding

source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a

medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute

corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for

noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object

code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b

above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making

modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source

code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the

scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a

special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally

distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,

kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that

component itself accompanies the executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a

designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same

place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not

compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as

expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,

sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate

your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or

rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long

as such parties remain in full compliance.

5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.

However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program

or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept

this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work

based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and

all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or

works based on it.

6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the

recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,

distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may

not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted

herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this

License.

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or

for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you

(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of

this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you

cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this

License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not

distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit

royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly

or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this

License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular

circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole

is intended to apply in other circumstances.

APPENDIX

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other

property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole

purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is

implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous

contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance

on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or

she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot

impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence

of the rest of this License.

8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries

either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who

places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical

distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted

only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License

incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the

General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in

spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or

concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a

version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the

option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later

version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a

version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free

Software Foundation.

10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose

distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For

software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free

Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will

be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our

free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS

NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY

APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING

THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE

PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND

PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE

PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL

NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED

TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER

PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS

PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING

ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE

PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR

DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY

YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO

OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR

OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the

public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can

redistribute and change under these terms.

To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the

start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each

file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is

found.

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the

terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software

Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY

WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public

License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with

this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place,

Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an

interactive mode:

Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with

ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and

you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.

The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts

of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called

something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu

items–whatever suits your program.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if

any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;

alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program

‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989

Ty Coon, President of Vice

This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into

proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more

useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you

want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.

■ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2.1, February 1999

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,

but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of

the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change

it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to

share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users.

This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated

software packages–typically libraries–of the Free Software Foundation and other

authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully

about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy

to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General

Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of

free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can

get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free

programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you

these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain

responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must

give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,

receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must

provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the

library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them

these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we

offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or

modify the library.

To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for

the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the

recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the

original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced

by others.

Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We

wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program

by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any

patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full

freedom of use specified in this license.

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General

Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain

designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We

use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-

free programs.

When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the

combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original

library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the

entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License

permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.

We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the

user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free

software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These

disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.

vii

However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.

For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest

possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this,

non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free

library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to

gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General

Public License.

In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a

greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission

to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the

whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it

does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom

and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay

close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that

uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter

must be combined with the library in order to run.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND

MODIFICATION

0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which

contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying

it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also

called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.

A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be

conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and

data) to form executables.

The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been

distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library

or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library

or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated

straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without

limitation in the term “modification”.)

“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making

modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all

modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used

to control compilation and installation of the library.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this

License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is

not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute

a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing

it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that

uses the Library does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source

code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and

appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and

disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to

the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the

Library.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your

option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus

forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications

or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of

these conditions:

a) The modified work must itself be a software library.

b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you

changed the files and the date of any change.

c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third

parties under the terms of this License.

d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be

supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an

argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good

faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such

function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its

purpose remains meaningful.

(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is

entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires

that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if

the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square

roots.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of

that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered

independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not

apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you

distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the

distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for

other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of

who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work

written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the

distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library

(or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium

does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License

instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all

the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU

General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version

than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then

you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change

in these notices.

Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary

GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works

made from that copy.

This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a

program that is not a library.

4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under

Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2

above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-

readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and

2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.

If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated

place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place

satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not

compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is

designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a

“work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of

the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.

However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable

that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather

than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License.

Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.

When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the

Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even

though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work

can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this

to be true is not precisely defined by law.

If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and

accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then

the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative

work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall

under Section 6.)

Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code

for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also

fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.

6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that

uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the

Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the

terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse

engineering for debugging such modifications.

You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it

and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of

this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include

the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the

user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:

a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable

source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the

work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the

work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-

readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so

that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified

executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user

who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not

necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified

definitions.)

b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A

suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library

already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library

functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified

version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version

is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.

c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give

the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no

more than the cost of performing this distribution.

viii

APPENDIX

d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a

designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified

materials from the same place.

e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you

have already sent this user a copy.

For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include

any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However,

as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is

normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components

(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,

unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other

proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a

contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable

that you distribute.

7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side

in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License,

and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of

the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise

permitted, and provided that you do these two things:

a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the

Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed

under the terms of the Sections above.

b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a

work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying

uncombined form of the same work.

8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except

as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,

sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically

terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received

copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses

terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.

However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library

or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept

this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work

based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and

all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or

works based on it.

10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the

recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,

distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions.

You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the

rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third

parties with this License.

11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or

for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you

(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of

this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you

cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this

License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not

distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit

royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly

or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this

License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular

circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole

is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other

property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole

purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is

implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous

contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance

on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or

she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot

impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence

of the rest of this License.

12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either

by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places

the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution

limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or

among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the

limitation as if written in the body of this License.

13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the

Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be

similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new

problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version

number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option

of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version

published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license

version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software

Foundation.

14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose

distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for

permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,

write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.

Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all

derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of

software generally.

NO WARRANTY

15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO

WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY

APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING

THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE

LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND

PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE

LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL

NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED

TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER

PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS

PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING

ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE

LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA

BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR

THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH

ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY

HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries

If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the

public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and

change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively,

under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).

To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach

them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of

warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where

the full notice is found.

This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the

terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free

Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any

later version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY

WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General

Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License

along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59

Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if

any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter

the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a

library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990

Ty Coon, President of Vice

That’s all there is to it!

List of remote control codes

CABLE

ABC 0030, 0035

AMERICAST 0926

BELL SOUTH 0926

BIRMINGHAM CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

0303

BRITISH TELECOM 0030

CABLE & WIRELESS

1095

DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

DIRECTOR 0503

FILMNET 0470

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0030, 0303, 0503,

0837,

GOLDSTAR 0171

HAMLIN 0036, 0300

JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503,

0837

LG 0171

MNET 0470

MEMOREX 0027

MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,

1133

NTL 1095

NOOS 0844

ONO 1095

PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX

0030

PACE 0264, 1087, 1095

PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134

PARAGON 0027

PHILIPS 0332, 0344

PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904,

1904

PULSAR 0027

QUASAR 0027

REGAL 0300, 0306

RUNCO 0027

SAGEM 0844

SAMSUNG 0027, 0171

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

SONY 1033

STARCOM 0030

SUPERCABLE 0303

TS 0030

TELE+1 0470

TELEWEST 1095

TORX 0030

TOSHIBA 0027

TRANS PX 0303

UNITED CABLE 0030

ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926

CD PLAYER

AIWA 0184

ARCAM 0184

AUDIO RESEARCH 0184

AUDIO TON 0184

AUDIOLAB 0184

AUDIOMECA 0184

CAIRN 0184

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS

0056

CARVER 0184, 0206

CYRUS 0184

DKK 0027

DMX ELECTRONICS

0184

DENON 0900

DYNAMIC BASS 0206

EMERSON 0332

FISHER 0206

GENEXXA 0059, 0332

GOODMANS 0332

GRUNDIG 0184

HARMAN/KARDON

0184, 0200

HITACHI 0059

JVC 0099

KENWOOD 0055, 0064

KRELL 0184

LXI 0332

LINN 0184

MCS 0056

MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332

MARANTZ 0056, 0184

MATSUI 0184

MEMOREX 0332

MERIDIAN 0184

MICROMEGA 0184

MIRO 0027

MISSION 0184

MYRYAD 0184

NAD 0027

NSM 0184

NAIM 0184

OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064,

0206, 0332

PANASONIC 0056

PHILIPS 0184

PIONEER 0059, 0332

POLK AUDIO 0184

PROTON 0184

QED 0184

QUAD 0184

QUASAR 0056

RCA 0059, 0206, 0332

REALISTIC 0206

REVOX 0184

ROTEL 0184

SAE 0184

SANSUI 0184, 0332

SANYO 0206

SCOTT 0332

SEARS 0332

SHARP 0064

SIMAUDIO 0184

SONIC FRONTIERS 0184

SONY 0027

SYMPHONIC 0332

TAG MCLAREN 0184

TANDY 0059

TECHNICS 0056

THORENS 0184

THULE 0184

UNIVERSUM 0184

VICTOR 0099

WARDS 0184

Yamaha 2300, 2301

CD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0653

MARANTZ 0653

PHILIPS 0653

Yamaha 2400

DVD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS

0757

ALBA 0744

AMSTRAD 0740

APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744,

0782, 0821, 0823,

0857, 1127

BLAUPINKT 0744

BLUE PARADE 0598

BUSH 0740

CENTREX 0699

CLATRONIC 0815

CYBERHOME 0741

DVD2000 0548

DAEWOO 0811, 0797

DANSAI 0797

DECCA 0797

DENON 0517

DIAMOND 0795

DIGITREX 0699

EMERSON 0618

ENTERPRISE 0618

FISHER 0697

GE 0549, 0744

GO VIDEO 0742

GOLDSTAR 0768

GRADIENTE 0678

GREENHILL 0744

GRUNDIG 0566

HITACHI 0600, 0691

HITEKER 0699

JVC 0585, 0650

KLH 0744

KENWOOD 0517, 0561

KOSS 0678

LG 0768

LIMIT 0795

MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702

MARANTZ 0566

MEMOREX 0858

MICO 0750

MICROSOFT 0549

MINTEK 0744

MITSUBISHI 0548

MUSTEK 0757

NESA 0744

ONKYO 0530

ORITRON 0678

PALSONIC 0699

PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389

PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673,

0881

PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658,

0659

POLK AUDIO 0566

PROSCAN 0549

QWESTAR 0678

RCA 0549, 0598, 0744

ROTEL 0650

SM ELECTRONIC 0757

SAMSUNG 0600

SANYO 0697

SHARP 0657

SHERWOOD 0797

SHINSONIC 0560

SLIM ART 0811

SONY 0560, 0891

SYLVANIA 0702

TATUNG 0797

TEAC 0598, 0744

TECHNICS 0517

THETA DIGITAL 0598

THOMSON 0549

TOSHIBA 0530

URBAN CONCEPTS 0530

XBOX 0549

Yamaha 0517, 0566, 0572,

2100

ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768

ZEUS 0811

HD DVD PLAYER

TOSHIBA 2103

DVD RECORDER

PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802

PHILIPS 2808

SHARP 2812, 2813

SONY 2809, 2810, 2811

Yamaha 2807

Blu-lay Disc player

PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802

SAMSUNG 2816

LD PLAYER

CARVER 0091

DENON 0086

MARANTZ 0091

MITSUBISHI 0086

NAD 0086

NAGSMI 0086

OPTIMUS 0086

PHILIPS 0091

PIONEER 0086

SALORA 0091

SONY 0228

TELEFUNKEN 0086

Yamaha 2200

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0708

ONKYO 0895

SHARP 0888

SONY 0517

Yamaha 2500, 2501, 2502

RECEIVER (TUNER)

ADC 0558

AIWA 0185, 1116, 1415,

1432, 1668

ALCO 1417

ANAM 1636

APEX DIGITAL 1284

AUDIOLAB 1216

AUDIOTRONIC 1216

APPENDIX

AUDIOVOX 1417

BOSE 1256

CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS

1397

CAPETRONIC 0558

CARVER 1116, 1216

CENTREX 1284

DENON 1387

FERGUSON 0558

FINE ARTS 1216

GRUNDIG 1216

HARMAN/KARDON

0137, 1331

INTEGRA 0162, 1325

JBL 0137, 1333

JVC 0101, 0558, 1401,

1522

KLH 1417, 1439

KENWOOD 1054, 1340

MCS 0066

MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,

1296,

MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216,

1316

MICROMEGA 1216

MUSICMAGIC 1116

MYRYAD 1216

NAD 0347

NORCENT 1416

ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325

OPTIMUS 0558, 1050

PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,

1790

PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293,

1295, 1296, 1310,

1316

PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050,

1411

POLK AUDIO 1316

PROSCAN 1281

QUASAR 0066

RCA 0558, 1050, 1281,

1417, 1636,

SABA 0558

SANSUI 1116

SCHNEIDER 0558

SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,

1685, 1785

STEREOPHONICS 1050

SUNFIRE 1340

TEAC 1417

TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336,

1545

TELEFUNKEN 0558

THOMSON 1281

THORENS 1216

UHER 0558

VENTURER 1417

VICTOR 0101

WARDS 0041, 0185

Yamaha 0203, 1203, 1358,

2601

(TUNER ID1) 2602

(TUNER ID2) 2603

(XM ID1) 2604

(XM ID2) 2605

(iPod) 2606

SATELLITE TUNER

@SAT 1327

ABSAT 0150

ALBA 0482

ALPHASTAR 0799

AMSTRAD 0874

ASTON 0169, 1156

ASTRO 0200

ATSAT 1327

AVALON 0423

BLAUPUNKT 0200

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING

0874, 1202

CANAL DIGITAL 0880

CANAL SATELLITE 0880

CANAL+ 0880

CHAPARRAL 0243

CITYCOM 1203

CONNEXIONS 0423

CROSSDIGITAL 1136

CYRUS 0227

D-BOX 0750, 1154

DMT 1102

DNT 0227, 0423

DAERYUNG 0423

DAEWOO 1323

DIGENIUS 0326

DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593,

0666, 0751, 0776,

0846, 1103, 1136,

1169, 1776, 1883

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

0802, 1032

DISHPRO 0802, 1032

DISTRATEL 0111

DREAM MULTIMEDIA

1264

ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,

0802, 0880, 0898,

1032, 1113

ENGEL 1044

EXPRESSVU 0802

FTE 0890

FINLUX 0482

FRACARRO 0898

FUBA 0423

GE 0593

GOI 0802

GALAXIS 0890, 1138

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0896

GOLD BOX 0880

GRUNDIG 0200, 0874

HTS 0802

HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423

HITACHI 0482, 0846

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM

0776, 1169, 1776

HUMAX 0890, 1203

INVIDEO 0898

JVC 0802

KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227,

0276, 0685, 1248

KREISELMEYER 0200

LABGEAR 1323

LOGIX 1044

LORENZEN 0326

MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751

MANHATTAN 0482, 1044,

1110

MARANTZ 0227

MEDIASAT 0880

MEMOREX 0751

METRONIC 0111

MITSUBISHI 0776

MOTOROLA 0896

MYRYAD 0227

NEXT LEVEL 0896

NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778,

1154, 1250, 1750

OCTALTV 1032

ORBITECH 1127

PACE 0482, 0874, 1202,

1350

PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,

1347

PANDA 0482

PAYSAT 0751

PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482,

0749, 0751, 0776,

0880, 1103, 1169,

1776

PIONEER 0880

PROMAX 0482

PROSCAN 0419, 0593

RCA 0170, 0419, 0593,

0882

RFT 0227

RADIOSHACK 0896

RADIOLA 0227

RADIX 0423

SKY 0874, 0883, 1202

SM ELECTRONIC 1227

SABRE 0482

SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280

SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303,

1319

SAT CONTROL 1327

SATSTATION 1110

SCHWAIGER 1138

SEEMANN 0423

SIEMENS 0200

SONY 0666, 0874, 1666

STAR CHOICE 0896

STRONG 1327

TPS 0847, 1280

TANTEC 0482

TECHNISAT 1126, 1127

TELESTAR 1127

THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073,

1318

TOPFIELD 1233

TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776

ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666

UNIDEN 0749, 0751

UNIVERSUM 0200

VENTANA 0227

WISI 0200, 0423, 0482

XSAT 0150

ZEHNDER 1102

ZENITH 0883, 1883

TAPE DECK

AIWA 0056

CARVER 0056

GRUNDIG 0056

HARMAN/KARDON

0056

MAGNAVOX 0056

MARANTZ 0056

MYRYAD 0056

OPTIMUS 0054

PHILIPS 0056

PIONEER 0054

POLK AUDIO 0056

RCA 0054

REVOX 0056

SANSUI 0056

SONY 0270

THORENS 0056

WARDS 0054

Yamaha 2700,2701

AGB 0543

AOC 0036, 0057, 0087,

0119, 0120, 0135,

0205, 0207, 0478

ASA 0131

AWA 0036

ACURA 0036

ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680

ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490

ADVENT 0788

AIKO 0119

AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235,

0388, 0543, 0729,

0839

AKURA 0291

ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398,

0695

AMERICA ACTION 0207

AMPRO 0778

AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198,

0398, 0439, 0460,

0543

ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277

ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677

ANITECH 0036

APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792,

0794

AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136

BANG & OLUFSEN 0592

BASIC 0036

BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539

BAYSONIC 0207

BEAUMARK 0205

BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,

0742

BELL & HOWELL 0181

BEON 0064

BLAUPUNKT 0222

BLUE SKY 0695, 1064

BONDSTEC 0274

BRADFORD 0207

BRANDT 0136, 0362

BROKSONIC 0263, 0490

BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398,

0401, 0695, 1064

CCE 0064

CGE 0274

CTC 0274

CXC 0207

CANDLE 0057

CARNIVALE 0057

CARVER 0081, 0197

CASCADE 0036

CATHAY 0064

CELEBRITY 0027

CELERA 0792

CENTURION 0064

CHANGHONG 0792

CHING TAI 0036, 0119

CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119,

0207

CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207

CIMLINE 0036

CINERAL 0119, 0478

CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119

CLARION 0207

CLARIVOX 0064

CLATRONIC 0274, 0397

CONDOR 0347, 0397

CONRAC 0835

CONTEC 0036, 0207

CRAIG 0207

CROSLEY 0081

CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207,

0397, 0445

CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,

0081, 0087, 0120,

0172, 0181, 0193,

0478, 0729, 1174,

1374

DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064,

0119, 0135, 0181,

0197, 0205, 0207,

0401, 0478, 0650,

0661, 1688

DANSAI 0064

DAYTON 0036

DE GRAAF 0235, 0575

DECCA 0064, 0543

DENON 0172

DIGATRON 0064

DIXI 0036, 0064

DUMONT 0044

DWIN 0747, 0801

ECE 0064

ELBE 0286

ELECTROBAND 0027

ELIN 0064, 0575

ELITE 0347

ELTA 0036

EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207,

0263, 0388, 0490,

0650

ENVISION 0057,0840

EPSON 0860

ERRES 0064

ETHER 0036, 0057

ETRON 0036

EUROPHON 0543

FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,

0265, 0314, 0362,

0587

FIDELITY 0388

FINLANDIA 0235, 0373

FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132,

0373, 0543

FIRSTAR 0036, 0263

FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695

FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235,

0397

FLINT 0482

FORMENTI 0064, 0347

FORTRESS 0120

FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291

FUJITSU 0710, 0836

FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291

FUTURETECH 0207

GE 0057, 0074, 0078,

0119, 0205, 0207,

0478, 0587, 1174,

1374, 1481

GEC 0064, 0543

GATEWAY 1782, 1783

GELOSO 0036

GENEXXA 0190

GIBRALTER 0044, 0057

GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,

0181, 0205, 0404

GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,

0661

GOREMJE 0397

GRADIENTE 0080, 0197

GRAETZ 0190, 0388

GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366,

0543

GRANDIN 0637

GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514,

0583, 0614

GRUNPY 0207

HCM 0036, 0439

HALLMARK 0205

HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207

HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,

0455, 0583

HANTAREX 0543

HARMAN/KARDON 0081

HARVARD 0207

HAVERMY 0120

HELLO KITTY 0478

HINARI 0036, 0064

HISAWA 0482

HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119,

0132, 0136, 0172,

0190, 0205, 0252,

0383, 0508, 0575,

0605, 1172, 1283

HUA TUN 0036

HUANYU 0401

HYPSON 0064, 0291

ICE 0291, 0398

ITS 0398

ITT 0190, 0388, 0575

IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445

INDIANA 0064

INFINITY 0081

INGELEN 0190

INNO HIT 0543

INNOVA 0064

INTEQ 0044

INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,

0388, 0539

INTERVISION 0064, 0291,

0404

JBL 0081

JCB 0027

JVC 0080, 0398, 0490,

0680, 0710

JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119,

0183, 0263

JENSEN 0788

KEC 0207

KTV 0057, 0207

KAISUI 0036

KAPSCH 0190

KARCHER 0637

KATHREIN 0583

KENDO 0064

KENWOOD 0057

KNEISSEL 0286, 0462

KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207

KORPEL 0064

KOYODA 0036

L&S ELECTRONIC 0835

LG 0057, 0064, 0087,

0135, 0205, 0741

LXI 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0205

LEYCO 0064, 0291

LIESENK & TTER 0064

LOEWE 0539

LUXOR 0383, 0388

M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064,

0131, 0132, 0136,

0190, 0314, 0373,

0401, 0507

MGA 0057, 0177, 0205

MTC 0057, 0087, 0539

MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543

MAGNAFON 0543

MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,

1481

MANESTH 0291, 0347

MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081,

0583

MARK 0064

MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235,

0398, 0514, 0543

MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677

MEDIATOR 0064

MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064

MEGATRON 0172, 0205

MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181,

0205, 0277, 0490,

1064

METZ 0474

MICROMAXX 0835

MICROSTAR 0835

MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078

MINERVA 0514

MINOKA 0439

MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,

0177, 0181, 0205,

0207, 0263, 0277,

0539, 0863, 1277

MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543,

0636

MOTOROLA 0120

MULTITECH 0036, 0207

MYRYAD 0583

NAD 0183, 0205, 0388,

0893

NEC 0036, 0057, 0078,

0181, 0183, 0197,

0205, 0482, 0524,

1731

NEI 0064

NTC 0119

NECKERMANN 0064, 0583

NETSAT 0064

NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120,

0205

NIKKAI 0064, 0291

NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205

NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507,

0575, 0658

NORCENT 0775, 0851

NORDMENDE 0136, 0314,

0587

OCEANIC 0190, 0388

ONWA 0207, 0460

OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277,

0677

OPTONICA 0120

ORION 0064, 0263, 0347,

0490, 0543

OSAKI 0291, 0439

OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347,

0539, 0583

PALLADIUM 0397, 0445

PANAMA 0291

PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,

0190, 0277, 0677,

1437

PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347

PAUSA 0036

PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078,

0087, 0183, 0205,

1374

PERDIO 0347

PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081,

0172, 0205, 0207,

0274, 0490, 1688

PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064,

0078, 0081, 0119,

0135, 0205, 0401,

0583, 0717, 1481

PHONOLA 0064

PILOT 0057

PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193,

0314, 0706, 0787,

0893

PORTLAND 0119

PRANDONI-PRINCE

0543

PRIMA 0788

PRISM 0078

PROFEX 0036, 0388

PROSCAN 0074

PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274,

0291, 0445, 0695

PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205

PULSAR 0044

QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677

QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

R-LINE 0064

RCA 0027, 0057, 0074,

0117, 0119, 0205,

0706, 1074, 1174,

1274, 1374, 1474,

1481, 1574

RFT 0455

RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074,

0181, 0205, 0207

RADIOLA 0064

RADIOMARELLI 0543

REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205,

0207

REDIFFUSION 0388

REOC 0741

REVOX 0064

REX 0190, 0286, 0291

ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445

RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524,

0630

SBR 0064

SEG 0291, 0695

SEI 0543

SKY 0064

SSS 0207

SABA 0136, 0190, 0314,

0362

SACCS 0265

SAGEM 0637

SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543

SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388,

0575

SAMBERS 0543

SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119,

0120, 0181, 0198,

0205, 0677, 1782

SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064,

0087, 0117, 0119,

0181, 0205, 0291,

0397, 0583, 0614,

0645, 0729, 0793,

0839, 0841

SANSEI 0478

SANSUI 0490

SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207,

0235, 0366, 0826

SCHAUB LORENZ 0388

SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,

0695

SCOTCH 0205

SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263

xii

APPENDIX

SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0198, 0205

SELECO 0190, 0286

SEMIVOX 0207

SEMP 0183

SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677

SHEN YING 0036, 0119

SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263

SIAREM 0543

SIEMENS 0064, 0222

SINUDYNE 0543

SKANTIC 0383

SKYGIANT 0207

SKYWORTH 0064

SOLAVOX 0190

SONITRON 0235

SONOKO 0036, 0064

SONOLOR 0190, 0235

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0677, 0861,

1127, 1532, 1678

SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207

SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445

SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119,

0183, 0205

SQUAREVIEW 0198

STANDARD 0036

STARLITE 0207

STERN 0190, 0286

SUPREME 0027

SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198

SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207

SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0478

SYSLINE 0064

T + A 0474

TCM 0835

TMK 0205

TNCI 0044

TVS 0490

TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205

TAI YI 0036

TANDY 0120, 0190

TASHIKO 0119, 0677

TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078,

0081, 0087, 0181,

0183, 0543

TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291,

0439, 0445, 0482,

0695, 1064

TEC 0274

TECHNEMA 0347

TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677

TECHWOOD 0078

TECO 0036, 0078, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0291,

0680

TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119,

0177, 0207

TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289,

0362, 0652, 0729

TELEMEISTER 0347

TELETECH 0036

TENSAI 0347

TERA 0057

THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587,

0652, 1474

THORN 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183,

0535, 0645, 0677,

0859, 1283, 1383,

1683, 1731

TRIUMPH 0543

TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119

UHER 0347

UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,

0291, 0373, 0397,

0519

VECTOR RESEARCH

0057

VESTEL 0064

VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677,

0680

VIDEOSAT 0274

VIDIKRON 0081

VIDTECH 0205

VIEWSONIC 1782

VISION 0347

VOXSON 0190

WALTHAM 0383

WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205,

0893

WATSON 0064, 0347

WAYCON 0183

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0064, 0347, 0490,

0650

Yamaha 0057, 0172, 0677,

0796, 0860,

2900 (projector),

2901 (projector),

2903,

2904 (projector)

YAPSHE 0277

YOKO 0064, 0291

ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205,

0490

VCR

ASA 0064, 0108

ADMIRAL 0075

ADVENTURA 0027

AIKO 0305

AIWA 0027, 0064, 0334,

0375, 0379

AKAI 0068, 0342

AKIBA 0099

ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342,

0379

AMERICA ACTION 0305

AMERICAN HIGH 0062

AMSTRAD 0027

ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267,

0305, 0507

ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589

ANITECH 0099

ASHA 0267

ASUKA 0064

AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305

BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131

BASIC LINE 0099, 0305

BEAUMARK 0267

BELL & HOWELL 0131

BLAUPUNKT 0253

BRANDT 0347

BRANDT ELECTRONIC

0068

BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506

BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379

CCE 0099, 0305

CGE 0027

CALIX 0064

CANON 0062

CARVER 0108

CIMLINE 0099

CINERAL 0305

CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305

COLT 0099

COMBITECH 0379

CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099,

0267

CROWN 0099, 0305

CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,

0087, 1062

CYBERNEX 0267

CYRUS 0108

DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305,

0669, 1305

DANSAI 0099

DE GRAAF 0069

DECCA 0027, 0108

DENON 0069

DUAL 0068

DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131

DYNATECH 0027

ESC 0267, 0305

ELCATECH 0099

ELECTROHOME 0064

ELECTROPHONIC 0064

EMEREX 0059

EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064,

0070, 0072, 0211,

0267, 0305, 1305,

1506

FERGUSON 0068, 0347

FIDELITY 0027

FINLANDIA 0108, 0131

FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108,

0131

FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072,

0099

FISHER 0074, 0131

FUJI 0060, 0062

FUJITSU 0027, 0072

FUNAI 0027

GE 0062, 0087, 0267,

0834, 1062, 1087

GEC 0108

GARRARD 0027

GENERAL 0072

GO VIDEO 0459

GOLDHAND 0099

GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,

1264

GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,

0305

GRADIENTE 0027

GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267

GRANADA 0108, 0131

GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099

GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253,

0374

HCM 0099

HI-Q 0074

HANSEATIC 0064

HARLEY DAVIDSON

0027

HARMAN/KARDON 0108

HARWOOD 0099

HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379

HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068,

0069, 0267

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

0069

HYPSON 0099

ITT 0068, 0131, 0267

ITV 0064, 0305

IMPERIAL 0027

INTERFUNK 0108

JVC 0068, 0072, 0094

JENSEN 0068

KEC 0064, 0305

KLH 0099

KAISUI 0099

KENWOOD 0068, 0094

KODAK 0062, 0064

KOLIN 0068, 0070

KORPEL 0099

LG 0064, 0069, 0072,

0507

LXI 0064

LENCO 0305

LEYCO 0099

LLOYD’S 0027

LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589

LOGIK 0099, 0267

LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131

M ELECTRONIC 0027

MEI 0062

MGA 0070, 0267

MGN TECHNOLOGY

0267

MTC 0027, 0267

MAGNASONIC 1305

MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,

0108, 1808

MAGNIN 0267

MANESTH 0072, 0099

MARANTZ 0062, 0108

MARTA 0064

MATSUI 0375, 0379

MATSUSHITA 0062

MEDION 0375

MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,

0066, 0074, 0075,

0131, 0267, 0334,

0375, 1264

MEMPHIS 0099

METZ 0064, 0374, 1589

MINOLTA 0069

MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,

0108, 0834

MOTOROLA 0062, 0075

MULTITECH 0027, 0099

MURPHY 0027

MYRYAD 0108

NAD 0131

NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075, 0094, 0131

NATIONAL 0253

NECKERMANN 0108

NESCO 0099

NEWAVE 0064

NIKKO 0064

NOBLEX 0267

NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267

NORDMENDE 0068, 0347

OCEANIC 0027, 0068

OKANO 0342, 0375

OLYMPUS 0062, 0253

OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,

0459

ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,

1506

OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099

OTTO VERSAND 0108

PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099

PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,

0643, 1062, 1589

PATHE MARCONI 0068

PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,

0267, 1062, 1264

PENTAX 0069

PERDIO 0027

PHILCO 0062

PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,

1108, 1208

PHONOLA 0108

xiii

PILOT 0064

PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108

POLK AUDIO 0108

PROFITRONIC 0267

PROLINE 0027

PROSCAN 0087, 1087

PROTEC 0099

PULSAR 0066

PYE 0108

QUASAR 0062, 1062

QUELLE 0108

RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,

0267, 0834, 1062,

1087

RADIOSHACK 0027

RADIOLA 0108

RADIX 0064

RANDEX 0064

REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,

0074, 0075, 0131

REOC 0375

REPLAYTV 0641, 0643

REX 0068

ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,

0305

RUNCO 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

SABA 0068, 0347

SALORA 0070

SAMPO 0064, 0075

SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459

SANKY 0066, 0075

SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,

1506

SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267

SAVILLE 0379

SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,

0131

SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108

SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211

SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,

0069, 0074, 0131,

1264

SELECO 0068

SEMP 0072

SHARP 0075, 0834

SHINTOM 0099, 0131

SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131

SILVA 0064

SINGER 0072, 0099

SINUDYNE 0108

SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,

0062, 0663, 1259

SUNKAI 0375

SUNSTAR 0027

SUNTRONIC 0027

SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,

0070, 1808

SYMPHONIC 0027

TMK 0267

TANDY 0027, 0131

TASHIKO 0027, 0064

TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,

0094, 0108

TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,

0334, 0669

TECHNICS 0062, 0253

TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075

TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064

TELEAVIA 0068

TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347

TENOSAL 0099

TENSAI 0027

THOMAS 0027

THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,

0347

THORN 0068, 0131

TIVO 0645, 0663

TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,

0094, 0108, 0872

TOTEVISION 0064, 0267

UHER 0267

UNITECH 0267

UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,

0267

VECTOR 0072

VICTOR 0068, 0094

VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072

VIDEOMAGIC 0064

VIDEOSONIC 0267

VILLAIN 0027

WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,

0074, 0075, 0087,

0099, 0108, 0267

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0099

XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099

Yamaha 0068

YAMISHI 0099

YOKAN 0099

YOKO 0267

ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,

1506

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V3800

Printed in Malaysia WK69470

RX-V3800

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V3800_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 11:13 PM

The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.

Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.

■ Front panel/Face avant

RX-V3800

ON/OFF

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

SLEEP

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

REC OUT/

ZONE2

PROGRAM

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

USB

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH MODE

EDIT

FM/AM

PRESET/

TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

MULTI ZONE

YPAO

B NACD

OP R

EFG H IJKL M

00_sheet_RX-V3800_UC.book Page 1 Wednesday, May 16, 2007 8:01 PM

■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

NET RADIO

USB

PC/MCX

VOLUME

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

3D DSP

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

TUNER

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX/DOCK

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

POWER

STANDBY

NET/USB

–

ENTER

TITLE

MUTE

ENT

SYSTEM MEMORY

TV VOL

MEMORY

POWER

–

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

RETURN

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

ENHANCERSTEREO

WK69550

Printed in Malaysia

00_sheet_RX-V3800_UC.book Page i Wednesday, May 16, 2007 8:01 PM

Yamaha RX-V3800 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V3800

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

Download PDF

rapport

in andere talen

English: Yamaha RX-V3800 Owner's manual
italiano: Yamaha RX-V3800 Manuale del proprietario
русский: Yamaha RX-V3800 Инструкция по применению
français: Yamaha RX-V3800 Le manuel du propriétaire
español: Yamaha RX-V3800 El manual del propietario
Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V3800 Bedienungsanleitung
português: Yamaha RX-V3800 Manual do proprietário
dansk: Yamaha RX-V3800 Brugervejledning
suomi: Yamaha RX-V3800 Omistajan opas
čeština: Yamaha RX-V3800 Návod k obsluze
svenska: Yamaha RX-V3800 Bruksanvisning
Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V3800 El kitabı
polski: Yamaha RX-V3800 Instrukcja obsługi
română: Yamaha RX-V3800 Manualul proprietarului

Yamaha RX-V3800 de handleiding

Yamaha RX-V3800 de handleiding

in andere talen

Gerelateerde artikelen

Andere documenten